FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

7/18/2019 FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fpia3000-user-manual-english-august-2006 1/430

Flow Particle Image Analyzer

FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000SOperator’s Manual

CHAPTER 1: FOR YOUR SAFETYCHAPTER 2: EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONSCHAPTER 3: PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING

CHAPTER 4: TESTINGCHAPTER 5: RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING

CHAPTER 6: QUALITY CONTROLCHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTINGCHAPTER 8: SOP SETTINGSCHAPTER 9: SYSTEM SETUPCHAPTER 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERSCHAPTER 11 DISPLAY SETUPCHAPTER 12 PRINT FORMATCHAPTER 13 USER AUTHENTICATIONCHAPTER 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

CHAPTER 15 MAINTENANCECHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONAPPENDIX A. INSTALLATIONAPPENDIX B. SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000SAPPENDIX C. TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGSAPPENDIX D. OUTPUT FORMATAPPENDIX E. GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S

RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS

APPENDIX F. FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLEAPPENDIX G. ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)APPENDIX H. HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)APPENDIX I. PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)APPENDIX J. FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL

SYSMEX CORPORATIONKOBE, JAPAN

Copyright® 2004-2006 by SYSMEX CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this Operator’s Manual may be Code No. 461-2139-2reproduced in any form or by any means whatsoever without PRINTED IN JAPANprior written permission of SYSMEX CORPORATION. Date of Last Revision: August 2006



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator’s Manual -- Revised December 2005

Sysmex is a registered trademark of Sysmex Corporation.

• PARTICLE SHEATH is a registered trademark of Sysmex Corporation.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

• All other company names and product names contained in this document may be trademarks or

registered trademarks of the respective owners.

• This document may not be copied or published in part or in its entirety without permission.

• Some of the screens that appear in this document may be different from what you mayactually see on your screen.

• Because of ongoing improvements made to the product, some of the descriptions containedin this document may not apply to the specific product you are using.



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 I

Table of contents

Chapter 1 FOR YOUR SAFETY1. How to use this product safely .....................................................................1-1

1.1 Explanation of labeling...........................................................................1-1

2. Introduction ..................................................................................................1-53. Signs............................................................................................................1-64. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..........................................................1-7

Chapter 2 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS1. Overview of the device.................................................................................2-12. System configuration ...................................................................................2-23. Overview of screen displays and switches ..................................................2-3

3.1 Names of components of the testing unit ..............................................2-33.2 Screen display of the data processing unit............................................2-4

4. Emergency stop...........................................................................................2-65. Types of alarms ...........................................................................................2-66. Packaging ....................................................................................................2-77. Installation....................................................................................................2-7

7.1 Installing and moving the instrument .....................................................2-77.2 Installation location................................................................................2-77.3 Grounding..............................................................................................2-8

8. Reagents......................................................................................................2-89. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S...........2-11

9.1 Front panel/right front panel.................................................................2-119.2 Rear side of the testing unit .................................................................2-13

9.3 Pneumatic unit .....................................................................................2-1510. Disposal ...................................................................................................2-17

Chapter 3 PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING1. Items to be checked before turning on the device .......................................3-1

1.1 Reagents ...............................................................................................3-11.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer) ..........................................3-11.3 Instrument inspection.............................................................................3-1

2. Turning on the device ..................................................................................3-23. Starting the analysis program and background check.................................3-3

3.1 Starting the analysis program................................................................3-33.2 Sheath liquid replacement .....................................................................3-53.3 Background Check ................................................................................3-73.4 Auto Focusing........................................................................................3-9

Chapter 4 TESTING1. Test flow.......................................................................................................4-12. Check instrument status ..............................................................................4-23. Test information setting................................................................................4-4



II Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

3.1 Sample information setting.................................................................... 4-43.2 SOP setting...........................................................................................4-53.3 Measurement condition settings ........................................................... 4-63.4 Analysis conditions................................................................................ 4-83.5 Setting instrument conditions................................................................4-9

4. Test procedure ..........................................................................................4-114.1 Preparing a sample .............................................................................4-114.2 Testing a sample................................................................................. 4-12

5. Display of analysis results ......................................................................... 4-146. Shutting down (turning off the power) .......................................................4-15

Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING1. Record Display and Processing ..................................................................5-1

1.1 Processing the record list...................................................................... 5-11.2 Screen composition............................................................................... 5-11.3 Explanation of functions ........................................................................ 5-2

1.4 Sort functions ........................................................................................ 5-71.5 The filter function...................................................................................5-91.6 Search functions .................................................................................5-111.7 Display reset .......................................................................................5-131.8 Sample information revision................................................................ 5-141.9 Reanalyze ...........................................................................................5-151.10 Deletion.............................................................................................5-161.11 Merging records ................................................................................5-161.12 Copying to the clipboard ................................................................... 5-171.13 Changing the record display ............................................................. 5-17

2. Processing analysis results ....................................................................... 5-18

2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5-182.2 Screen composition.............................................................................5-182.3 Moving records....................................................................................5-202.4 Thumbnail image display .................................................................... 5-212.5 Reanalyze ...........................................................................................5-222.6 Selection particle save ........................................................................ 5-342.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen........................... 5-34

3. Particle image list ...................................................................................... 5-353.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5-353.2 Screen composition.............................................................................5-353.3 Copying to the clipboard .....................................................................5-36

3.4 Detailed information display ................................................................5-374. Frequency tables....................................................................................... 5-38

4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5-384.2 Screen composition.............................................................................5-384.3 Copying to the clipboard .....................................................................5-38

5. Multi Scattergrams ....................................................................................5-395.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5-395.2 Screen composition.............................................................................5-39



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 III

5.3 Copying to clip board ...........................................................................5-395.4 View settings........................................................................................5-405.5 Image...................................................................................................5-405.6 Image (Reference)...............................................................................5-40

6. Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................................................5-406.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-406.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-416.3 Copying to the clipboard......................................................................5-416.4 Setting up display ................................................................................5-41

7. Meta Data ..................................................................................................5-427.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-427.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-427.3 Copying to the clipboard......................................................................5-42

8. Detail Results.............................................................................................5-438.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-438.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-438.3 Copying to the clipboard......................................................................5-43

9. Graph (Trend-View) ...................................................................................5-449.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-449.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-449.3 Copying to the clipboard......................................................................5-459.4 Setting up display ................................................................................5-45

10. The File menu..........................................................................................5-4510.1 File menu items .................................................................................5-4510.2 New ...................................................................................................5-4610.3 Open..................................................................................................5-4710.4 Import ................................................................................................5-48

10.5 Save ..................................................................................................5-5010.6 Printing ..............................................................................................5-5210.7 PDF Print ...........................................................................................5-5310.8 CSV export ........................................................................................5-5510.9 Transmission to the host....................................................................5-56

Chapter 6 QUALITY CONTROL1. Quality control ..............................................................................................6-1

1.1 Overview of quality control.....................................................................6-11.2 File Settings...........................................................................................6-21.3 Adding a quality control file....................................................................6-3

1.4 Deleting a quality control file..................................................................6-51.5 Target setting.........................................................................................6-61.6 Auto target .............................................................................................6-61.7 Deleting a quality control data ...............................................................6-7

Chapter 7 TROUBLESHOOTING1. Error messages............................................................................................7-1

1.1 Resetting the alarm................................................................................7-1



IV Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

1.2 Reverting from an error ......................................................................... 7-21.3 Display of error history .......................................................................... 7-3

2. Error message list .......................................................................................7-42.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)................................................... 7-42.2 Error code list........................................................................................ 7-62.3 Error message list by function............................................................... 7-7

3. Error messages and troubleshooting ..........................................................7-9

Chapter 8 SOP SETTINGS1. SOP settings ............................................................................................... 8-1

1.1 Explanation of SOP...............................................................................8-11.2 Using SOPs........................................................................................... 8-11.3 Registering SOPs.................................................................................. 8-11.4 Changing SOP's name.......................................................................... 8-21.5 Editing and deleting SOPs ....................................................................8-21.6 SOP Import / Export ..............................................................................8-4

Chapter 9 SYSTEM SETUP1. System setup............................................................................................... 9-1

1.1 Setting menu items ............................................................................... 9-11.2 System settings.....................................................................................9-1

2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S) ......................................... 9-52.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics............................................. 9-52.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings................................................. 9-6

Chapter 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERS

1. Analysis parameters..................................................................................10-1

Chapter 11 DISPLAY SETUP1. View settings .............................................................................................11-1

1.1 View settings – Record list ..................................................................11-21.2 View settings – Result (Graph) ...........................................................11-31.3 View settings – Result (List)................................................................ 11-61.4 View settings – Graph (Trend-View) ...................................................11-71.5 View settings – Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................ 11-9

Chapter 12 PRINT FORMAT1. Print format................................................................................................12-11.1 Importing File ......................................................................................12-21.2 Saving Files - All Data......................................................................... 12-41.3 Saving Files - Selected Data............................................................... 12-41.4 New format creation and editing .........................................................12-51.5 [Save New] button............................................................................. 12-241.6 [Delete] button...................................................................................12-241.7 [Preview] button ................................................................................12-25



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 V

Chapter 13 USER AUTHENTICATION1. User Authentication....................................................................................13-1

1.1 Change password................................................................................13-11.2 User Registration.................................................................................13-21.3 Lockout ..............................................................................................13-14

1.4 Setting Default Database...................................................................13-141.5 Change logon user ............................................................................13-15

Chapter 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit.............................................14-1

1.1 Adjusting the pressure.........................................................................14-12. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit...................................................14-2

2.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit ............................................14-22.2 Pressure adjustment points .................................................................14-32.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure...............................................................14-42.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.......................................................14-5

Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE1. Introduction ................................................................................................15-12. Executing sequences.................................................................................15-1

2.1 Auto rinse ............................................................................................15-12.2 Revert from error .................................................................................15-22.3 Manual focusing...................................................................................15-22.4 Background Check ..............................................................................15-42.5 Sheath liquid exchange .......................................................................15-52.6 Compressor ON...................................................................................15-8

2.7 Cover open/close.................................................................................15-82.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness.......................................................15-82.9 Stir motor adjustment...........................................................................15-8

3. Changing fuses ..........................................................................................15-93.1 Changing the fuse in the testing unit ...................................................15-93.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit ...........................................15-103.3 Periodic Replacement Parts ..............................................................15-11

4. Help..........................................................................................................15-114.1 Table of Contents ..............................................................................15-114.2 Version information............................................................................15-11

Chapter 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION1. Testing principles .......................................................................................16-12. Image processing.......................................................................................16-23. Particle analysis .........................................................................................16-34. Statistical analysis......................................................................................16-55. List of display items....................................................................................16-7

5.1 Particle diameter parameters...............................................................16-75.2 Form parameters .................................................................................16-8



VI Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

5.3 Other test data ....................................................................................16-95.4 Statistical analysis items .....................................................................16-95.5 Analysis data.....................................................................................16-10

Appendix A INSTALLATION

1. Preparation for installation...........................................................................A-11.1 Accessories...........................................................................................A-11.2 Place and space for installation ............................................................A-51.3 Exterior dimensions...............................................................................A-7

2. Installation ...................................................................................................A-82.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation ...........................................A-82.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S) ...........................A-152.3 Connecting the tubes ..........................................................................A-172.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables .........................A-222.5 Grounding ...........................................................................................A-252.6 Installing the analysis PC ....................................................................A-26

3. Installation of Acrobat Reader ...................................................................A-30

Appendix B SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/

3000S1. Specifications ..............................................................................................B-1

Appendix C TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS1. Table of system settings............................................................................. C-12. Table of SOP settings ................................................................................ C-3

Appendix D OUTPUT FORMAT1. Summary.................................................................................................... D-12. Serial communications ............................................................................... D-1

2.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-12.2 Communication Format........................................................................ D-12.3 Signal Level.......................................................................................... D-22.4 Protocols used in communication with the host ................................... D-22.5 Class A communications...................................................................... D-22.6 Class B communications...................................................................... D-32.7 Processing of communication errors with the host............................... D-4

2.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side....................................................... D-43. Ethernet communications........................................................................... D-53.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-53.2 Software............................................................................................... D-53.3 Text format ........................................................................................... D-63.4 Transmission format selection ............................................................. D-6

4. Data format................................................................................................. D-74.1 Test results (limited data)..................................................................... D-74.2 Histogram data..................................................................................... D-9



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 VII

4.3 Scattergram data ................................................................................D-114.4 Extend data ........................................................................................D-13

5. Particle form..............................................................................................D-19

Appendix E GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S

RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS1. Gas sensor level setting values ..................................................................E-12. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents ........................................E-2

Appendix F FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE1. Focus adjusting particle .............................................................................. F-12. Preparation of focus adjustment sample..................................................... F-2

Appendix G ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit) ................................G-1

1.1 Overview...............................................................................................G-12. Settings and Usage.....................................................................................G-2

2.1 Settings Details.....................................................................................G-22.2 SOP Settings ........................................................................................G-4

3. Background Count Generated by Erosion ..................................................G-53.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit........................................G-53.2 When using the High Magnification Unit...............................................G-63.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit................................................G-7

4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned .............................G-7

Appendix H HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit ....................................................................H-1

1.1 Features ...............................................................................................H-11.2 General Information of the Lens Unit....................................................H-2

2. Installation...................................................................................................H-32.1 Preparation for installation....................................................................H-32.2 Installation (Changing hardware)..........................................................H-4

3. Preparation for testing...............................................................................H-113.1 Starting the analysis program.............................................................H-11

4. Testing ......................................................................................................H-185. Analyze .....................................................................................................H-19

6. SOP settings.............................................................................................H-207. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit)...........................H-218. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit) ...........................H-26

Appendix I PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11) .........................I-1

1.1 Features .................................................................................................I-12. Installation of the Part 11 Software...............................................................I-2



VIII Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

2.1 Install...................................................................................................... I-23. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software ........................................................ I-3

3.1 Preparation for testing............................................................................ I-33.2 Testing ................................................................................................... I-33.3 Stored Data Display and Processing ..................................................... I-33.4 Error Treatment...................................................................................... I-33.5 SOP settings .......................................................................................... I-33.6 User Verification..................................................................................... I-33.7 Audit Trail Function ................................................................................ I-43.8 Others .................................................................................................... I-4

4. Audit trail ...................................................................................................... I-64.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ I-64.2 Reviewing audit trail ............................................................................... I-64.3 CSV Export ............................................................................................ I-84.4 Print........................................................................................................ I-84.5 Filter ....................................................................................................... I-9

Appendix J FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL1. Overview ..................................................................................................... J-1

1.1 Overview............................................................................................... J-11.2 Principle of Dark Field Test................................................................... J-1

2. Installation ................................................................................................... J-23. Specifications .............................................................................................. J-34. Changing hardware ..................................................................................... J-45. Starting the analysis program.................................................................... J-10

5.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................. J-105.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid ................................................................. J-12

5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit....... J-155.4 Checking Light Field System............................................................... J-15

6. Testing....................................................................................................... J-167. Analyze...................................................................................................... J-178. SOP settings ............................................................................................. J-189. Maintenance.............................................................................................. J-28

9.1 Quality Control .................................................................................... J-289.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness...................................................... J-28



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

Chapter 1 FOR YOUR SAFETY

1. How to use this product safely .................................................................... 1-11.1 Explanation of labeling .......................................................................... 1-1

2. Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-5

3. Signs ........................................................................................................... 1-6

4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).......................................................... 1-7



FOR YOUR SAFETY

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 1-1

1. How to use this product safely

Read this section and the Operator’s Manual carefully before using the instrument.

For proper and safe use of this product and to prevent injury to the user and other people or damage

to property, precautionary notes are inserted with signs to draw your attention as shown below.

The illustrations and meaning are described in the following.Be sure to understand the meaning of these signs before proceeding to read this document.

1.1 Explanation of labeling

WARNINGMishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause death or

severe injury to the user and/or serious physical damage to property.

CAUTIONMishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause injury to theuser, affect output results or cause physical damage to property.



FOR YOUR SAFETY

1-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

WARNING

• If you smell something strange or notice fumes, turn off the power switch immediately, and unplug

the power cord.

Failure to do so could result in fire, electrocution or injury.Contact your dealer or the nearest Sysmex office immediately for an inspection.

• Do not spill liquids, such as reagents, and do not put metallic items such as staples or clips inside

the instrument, to avoid short circuits or fumes.

Shorting and smoke emission could result. Should any abnormality occur, turn off the instrumentimmediately, unplug the power cord the outlet, and contact your dealer or the Sysmex office for an

inspection.

• Never open the instrument cover or case while the instrument is running.

Doing so may result in electric shock or injury.

• Be sure to wear rubber gloves during maintenance or inspection.

Use the specified tools and components.After finishing work, wash your hands with disinfectant.

• Pay special attention when handling waste liquid.

If your body or clothes come in contact with waste water, wash it off with disinfectant.

Handling of organic solvents

• Do not use fire when you use inflammable organic solvents.

It may cause fire.

• Ventilate the instrument circumference.

It may cause a fire or exposure to toxic substance.

• Please install the fire extinguisher corresponding to the organic solvent near the instrument.

• When you preparing a sample, exchange sheath liquid or waste liquid, please use protection

implements (e.g. glove, mask, glasses) according to the MSDS.

• If you swallow a reagent or get it in your eyes or on your skin, take first-aid action according to the

MSDS, and call a doctor immediately.

• When you use an organic solvent, please take necessary measures according to MSDS.



FOR YOUR SAFETY


WARNING

Use of reagents

• If a reagent gets into your eyes, wash it off with running water, and see a doctor immediately.

• If you swallow a reagent by mistake, call a doctor immediately and drink large amounts of water to

induce vomiting.

• If your hands or skin come in contact with a reagent, wash it off with running water.

• Discard waste liquid and consumables for the instrument according to the rules governing industrial

waste, etc.

• Do not modify the instrument.

Voltage, connection and grounding of the power unit:

• Do not plug the power cord into any electric outlet other than 100 V.

Doing so can cause fire or electric shock.

• The instrument must be given a ground (earth) connection when it is first installed.

Doing so can cause fire or electric shock.

Handling power cables

• Do not damage, put a heavy item onto, or pull the power cord by force.

Doing so can cause fire or electric shock due to a short circuit or disconnection.

• Be sure to turn off the instrument before connecting a peripheral (a printer, etc.) or to the host

computer.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.



FOR YOUR SAFETY

1-4 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

CAUTION

Use of reagents

• After opening the container, make sure that no dust, dirt or bacteria get in.

• Do not use a reagent that has passed its expiry date.

• Handle reagents carefully so that no bubbles are formed in them.

• Be careful not to spill reagents. If they spill, wipe them off with a wet cloth immediately.

• Follow the directions given on the container.

• If you consider yourself to be inexperienced in using the instrument, be sure to use it under guidance

or with the assistance of an experienced person.

• In the event of any malfunction of the instrument, the administrator of the instrument should first

attempt to solve the problem according to the instructions explicitly described in this manual. If thereare no appropriate instructions in the manual, contact your dealer or the Sysmex office for an

inspection.

• Unpacking, installation and confirmation of the initial operation are to be performed by service

personnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office.

About the environment of operation:

• Install the instrument in a place where there is no risk of it being splashed with water.

• Avoid high temperatures, high humidity, dust or direct sunlight.

• Do not subject the instrument to strong vibrations or shocks.

• Do not install the instrument in the vicinity of chemicals or gas.

Handling of software:

• In the data processing unit, do not install software other than that specified by Sysmex to avoid

abnormal operation of software.

The software might not function normally in some circumstances.

• Exit the FPIA-3000 application before executing any other application.

When connecting peripherals:

• We do not guarantee connectiion availability between printers or peripherals and personal

computers.

Contact any manufacturers of personal computers or peripherals you use.

• Use the built-in hard disk for the data storage folder to store test data obtained using the FPIA-3000.

• Do not use peripheral equipment such as an external hard disk for the database folder to store test

data since the use of such device might prevent the FPIA-3000 from performing its normal test

operation.



FOR YOUR SAFETY


2. Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the Sysmex® FPIA-3000/3000S Flow Particle Image analyzer.

Use this product correctly, after reading this manual thoroughly.

After you have read this manual, store it in a safe place where it will be easily available for later

reference.



FOR YOUR SAFETY


3. Signs

What They Mean

Signs used in the explanations for operating the instrument

Explanations of operation methods in this manual use the following notation:

• A button name within brackets means a button for a data-processing program.

(e.g., [OK], [Cancel] )

• [XYZ] also indicates the name of a menu.

(e.g., [File], [Stored data screen] )

WARNINGThis indicates situations where working while carrying a static chargecould result in explosive ignition by static electricity.

WARNINGMishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause death orsevere injury to the user and/or serious physical damage to property.

CAUTIONMishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause injury to theuser, affect output results or cause physical damage to property.

CAUTION: Items that users should know in order to maintain the performance of andprevent damage to the instrument.

NOTE: Information that is useful to know when using the instrument.

NOTE: • Some of the screens that appear in this document may be different from what

you actually see on your screen or print out.• Because of ongoing improvements made to the product, some of thedescriptions contained in this document may not apply to the specific productyou are using.



FOR YOUR SAFETY

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 1-7

4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

This instrument complies to the following IEC(EN) standards.

• IEC61326:2002(EN61326:1997+A1:1998+A2:2000+A3:2003)

Equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use EMC Requirements.• EMS(Electro-magnetic susceptibility(=interference radiation))

For this issue the minimum requirements with regards to immunity are fulfilled.

• EMI(Electro-magnetic interference(=resistance to jamming))

For this issue the requirements of class A are fulfilled.



FOR YOUR SAFETY


Blank page.




Chapter 2 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS

1. Overview of the device ................................................................................2-1

2. System configuration...................................................................................2-2

3. Overview of screen displays and switches.................................................. 2-33.1 Names of components of the testing unit.............................................. 2-33.2 Screen display of the data processing unit ........................................... 2-4

4. Emergency stop .......................................................................................... 2-6

5. Types of alarms........................................................................................... 2-6

6. Packaging.................................................................................................... 2-7

7. Installation ...................................................................................................2-77.1 Installing and moving the instrument..................................................... 2-77.2 Installation location................................................................................ 2-77.3 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-8

8. Reagents ..................................................................................................... 2-8

9. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S .......... 2-11

9.1 Front panel/right front panel ................................................................ 2-119.2 Rear side of the testing unit ................................................................2-139.3 Pneumatic unit ....................................................................................2-15

10. Disposal................................................................................................... 2-17

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS


1. Overview of the device

The FPIA-3000 is a Flow Particle Image analyzer combining flat sheath flow formation technology

and image processing technology.

The FPIA-3000 guides a suspension of particles to a transparent flow cell to form a flat sample

flow, and irradiates pulse light to the flat sample flow to take images of the particles. All capturedimages can be displayed at once after testing. By analyzing the images of particles, information

such as the sizes and shapes of the particles can be obtained for analysis and display of histograms.

Particle images of up to 1,000 samples can be stored in the image storage device.

Other than PARTICLE SHEATH, four other types of alcohol can be used as dispersant.

The FPIA-3000S instrument is an improved version of the FPIA-3000 against the solvent resistant

characteristics, to expand the applicable dispersion medium over PARTICLE SHEATH and 4

kinds of lower alcohol.

Those particle that is difficult to disperse either in the PARTICLE SHEATH or the low alcohol or

those particle that is deformed by dissolving, shrinking or expanding can be analyzed by the FPIA-

3000S by dispersing in a suitable organic solvent that meets with the particle characteristics.

Dispersion medium of the PARTICLE SHEATH and variety of organic solvents can be used.You can view particle images and histogram analysis results of previously tested samples while

performing a test.

Cell size distributions and histogram analysis results can also be output to a printer or a host

computer.

Exterior view of this system and its peripherals

Figure 2-1: Testing unit and analysis unit of the FPIA-3000/3000S

Testing unit

Data processing unit

Monitor

Mouse

(Input device)

Keyboard

(Input device)Reagent

Pneumatic unit





2. System configuration

Figure 2-2: System configuration

The FPIA-3000 is composed of three units as described below.

FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit

(1) Testing unit

Captures particle images.

(2) Pneumatic unit

Supplies the testing unit with the required positive and negative pressures.

FPIA-3000/3000S analysis unit

(3) Data processing unit (analysis PC)

It analyzes and displays particle images captured by the testing unit.

CAUTION• In the data processing unit, do not install software other than that specified by

Sysmex. The software may not operate normally.• For data processing, prepare the personal computer that meets specifications

we require. For details about the specification, contact your dealer or thenearest Sysmex office.

External monitor

Printer

Host computerStorage device

PC for Analysis

Pneumatic unit

Testing unit

Standard Configuration





3. Overview of screen displays and switches

The FPIA-3000/3000S carries out all operations in the data processing unit. The data-processing

program runs under Windows, and most of the operations can be executed using a mouse.

3.1 Names of components of the testing unit

Figure 2-3: Components of the analysis unit(1) STATUS lamp

The lamp displays the status of the unit with 3-color LEDs

Green: the system is ready to run tests.

Yellow: a sequence is running.

Red: the system is not ready to run tests.

(2) Power switch

Press this switch to turn the power on or off. This switch is also used to stop the device in an

emergency during a test.

(1) STATUS lamp

(2) Power switch





3.2 Screen display of the data processing unit

Figure 2-4: The display screen

(1) The menu bar

Menu items for operations that can be performed by the FPIA-3000/3000S are displayed here.

The items in the menu bar may be unavailable for selection, depending on the authorization

gained at logon, the screen currently displayed, the record data and other factors.

(2) Tabs

Tabs can be used to specify how analysis results should be displayed.

Item Tab content

Record List A tabular list of all analysis results stored in the DB is displayed.

Analysis Results Frequency distributions and other aspects of the analysis results are displayedfor the record selected in the record list.

Particle Image List All particle images are displayed for the record selected in the record list.

Frequency Table The frequency table for analysis results is displayed for the record selected inthe record list.

Meta Data Data such as system status and settings at the time of analysis are displayedfor the record selected in the record list.

Detail Results All analysis results for particle diameter and form parameters are displayed.

Multi Scattergrams The scattergram trend across multiple analysis results is displayed for therecords selected in the record list.

Graph(Overlay-View) The frequency distributions for multiple analysis results are displayedsuperimposed on one graph for the records selected in the record list.

Graph(Trend-View) The trend graph for multiple analysis results is displayed for the recordsselected in the record list.

Table 2-1: Tab display items

(1) The menu bar

(3) Status bar

(2) Tabs





(3) Status bar

The items displayed in the status bar are as listed below:

(4) Menu Icons

Item Display Content of the item

System status Green Lights when the system is ready to run tests.

Red Lights when the system is not ready to run

tests.

Yellow Lights when a sequence is running.

Status (Display examples)• Standby• Testing• Shutdown• Not Ready• Pneumatic unit off• Not connecting to the main

unit

Messages are displayed according to thetesting unit status.

No. of records Stored: XXXDisplay: XXX

[Stored] column displays total number ofstored. [Display] column shows the number of

records that are displayed as records.

Log-on ID status Log-on Name The log-on name is displayed.

Log-on Group Name The log-on group name is displayed.

Table 2-2: Status bar display items

Create a new database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, New.)

Open an existing database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Open.)

Saves selected data into another database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Save.)

Executes printing. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Printing .)

Opens [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog. (For details, refer to Chapter 4, Test

information setting .)

NOTE: Users can prevent the display of Menu icons. For details refer to Appendix C, TABLE OFSYSTEM SETTINGS.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





4. Emergency stop

If the instrument requires an emergency stop during testing or other operations, turn OFF the power

switch for the FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit.

5. Types of alarms

The FPIA-3000/3000S generates four types of alarms to indicate different state as described below.

(1) Error sound (peep)

This alarm sounds when some abnormalities occur in the testing unit. It will continue to sound

until the [Stop Alarm] button is pressed.

(2) Test start (pi pi pip)

This alarm sounds when a sample has been loaded into the instrument and the [Start] button

is pressed.

(3) Auto focusing (pip pip pip)

This tone sounds every time the auto-focusing mechanism moves one step during auto

focusing.

(4) Reverted from error (pip)

This sound is heard when the device reverts from an error.

WARNING• If the instrument fails and the organic solvent leaks inside the testing unit,

following error messages will be displayed. Immediately turn OFF the powerswitch of the FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit, and consult a Sysmex servicerepresentative for assistance.There is a potential to get fire or explosion when evaporated gas catches fire.

• Error messages when detecting leakage of the organic solvent:

Error message Description

Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit. A gas sensor detected a solventleakage in the hydraulic unit.

Solvent is Leaked from detector. A gas sensor detected a solvent leak inthe optical detector unit.





6. Packaging

The instrument is thoroughly checked before it leaves the factory, and it is packaged with care to

withstand shock during transport. Once the instrument is delivered, check all packages to confirm

that none are damaged on the outside.

Unpacking, installation and confirmation of the initial operation are to be performed by servicepersonnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office. Each unit of the device is packaged separately.

7. Installation

7.1 Installing and moving the instrument

Installation of the FPIA-3000/3000S and its peripherals is to be performed by a Sysmex service

representative. If the device has to be moved after it has been installed, contact your Sysmex servicerepresentative.

Any problem caused as a result of moving it by the user will not be covered by the warranty even

if the problem occurs within the warranty period. Please note this.

7.2 Installation location

NOTE: See Appendix A, 1.1 Accessories for details of the accessories.

WARNING• Do not use fire when using flammable organic solvents. It may cause fire.• Please install the fire extinguisher suitable for the organic solvent near the

instrument.

WARNING • When an organic solvent is used as the sheath fluid, install a local ventilationdevice and make ventilation around the FPIA-3000/3000S. It may cause a fireor exposure to toxic substance.

• The organic solvent evaporated from the sample chamber is exhausted fromthe opening located center top of the FPIA-3000/3000S rear panel, shown in theFigure 2-5. When a local ventilation device is used, efficiently aspirate the gasexhausted from this opening with a duct.

Exhaust opening from the sample chamber

Figure 2-5: Exhaust Opening in the center top of the FPIA-3000S Rear Panel

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





7.3 Grounding

The instrument power supply cord uses a three-prong plug. When the power supply socket is

provided with grounding, simply plug it to the socket. If the socket is not a three-prong grounded

socket, use the adapter plug provided and connect the ground cable.

Figure 2-6: Power Cord Plugs

8. Reagents

WARNING• The instrument must always be grounded when operated. Inadequate

grounding may cause electric shock.

CAUTION• The testing unit and pneumatic unit each have their own power cords.

Therefore, two power sockets are required.

CAUTION

• Do not spill the organic solvent nor the PARTICLE SHEATH. If spilt, turn OFF

the instrument power switch, disconnect the power cord, and take thenecessary action by referring to the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet).

• FPIA-3000S specifications are assured only when the PARTICLE SHEATH isused as the sheath fluid. When any other sheath fluid than PARTICLE SHEATHis used, the particle image may be different due to the refractive index of thesheath fluid used. Accordingly, the analysis results of the particle diameter andthe circularity may be different from those analyzed using the PARTICLESHEATH.

WARNING• When a flammable organic solvent is used as a sheath fluid, make a ventilation

around the instrument by installing a local ventilation device, if required. It maycause a fire or exposure to toxic substance.

• Do not use fire near the instrument when a flammable organic solvent is used

as a sheath fluid. It may cause fire.• In the case of fire, install a fire extinguisher suitable to the organic solvent to be

used.• When handling the organic solvent, follow the instructions given in the MSDS

(Material Safety Data Sheet).• When an organic solvent is used for the sheath fluid, after shutting down the

instrument, securely cap the solvent container and the waste container andstore them in a safe place. If the solvent container and the waste container areleft without capping, it may cause fire or explosion after gas is filled in the room.





(1) sheath liquid (PARTICLE SHEATH)

The FPIA-3000 uses PARTICLE SHEATH as sheath liquid and rinse fluid. PARTICLE

SHEATH is aspirated into the instrument each time a test is conducted. For each test,

approximately 130 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH are used.

Figure 2-7: PARTICLE SHEATH container

(2) Sheath liquid (alcohol type)If alcohol is used as the dispersant in this instrument, the sheath liquid must be changed to the

same alcohol. Use alcohol as specified below.

(3) Sheath liquid (Organic solvent-only for FPIA-3000S)

When an organic solvent is used as a dispersion medium, use the same organic solvent as a

sheath fluid to form a stable flat sheath.

The FPIA-3000S uses a specific hydraulic part listed in the Table 2-4 “FPIA-3000S Hydraulic

Part Material” that is resistant to the organic solvent, to prevent those hydraulic part from being

affected when the organic solvent listed in the APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR SETTING

VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS is used as thesheath fluid.

However, the APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-

3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS shows the applicability and compatibility of

the hydraulic parts against the organic solvent, well focused particle images may not be

obtained depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent since a stable

sheath is not formed. If the ignition point, the boiling point, or the melting point is very low,

there is a potential of a fire or an explosion.

Alcohol Standard for compliance

Methanol JIS K 8891

Ethanol JIS K 8101

Isopropanol JIS K 8838

Ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%) JIS K 8105

Table 2-3: Alcohol compliance standards

NOTE: The FPIA-3000/3000S forms a flat sample flow to a flow cell to capture focused particleimages. The sheath liquid is the reagent used for forming the flat sheath flow.

PARTICLE SHEATH





Check if the organic solvent to be applied is suitable with the Table 2-5 “Specifications of the

Organic Solvent applicable to the FPIA-3000S”, and handle the solvent according to the MSDS

(Material Safety Data Sheet).

Hydraulic Part Material Used

Chamber Glass, Stainless Steel (SUS316)

Tube Teflon (FEP), Perfluoro-elastomer

Fitting Teflon (PTFE), Peek resign, Stainless steel (SUS316)

Seal Perfluoro-elastomer

Cylinder, Valve wetted Peek resign

Table 2-4: FPIA-3000S Hydraulic Part Material

Ignition point 200°C or higher

Boiling point 60°C or higher

Melting point 20°C or lower

Viscosity 0.3 - 2.0 [mPa•s] (at 25°C)

Specific gravity 0.65 or higher

Table 2-5: Specifications of the Organic Solvent applicable to the FPIA-3000S





9. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S

9.1 Front panel/right front panel

Figure 2-8: Front panel/right front panel of the testing unit

(1) STATUS lamp

You can judge whether the unit is ready to run tests. When the FPIA-3000 is ready to test, thislamp lights up in green.

(2) Electricity caution mark

(3) Cover open/close caution mark

(4) Mixing caution mark

WARNINGIf the organic solvent is used, discharge static electricity by touching anygrounded metal before starting to operate it. Otherwise, there is the risk of alcoholignition.

WARNINGThe testing unit cover opens and closes automatically during testing. Keep yourfingers well clear of the cover.

WARNING Keep clear of the mixing motor and mixing blades when pouring reagents.

(1) STATUS lamp

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Mixing motor

(6) Testing unit cover

(7) Pressure regulator unit cover

(8) Pressure regulator for rinsing

(9) Bellows pressure governor

(10) Power switch





9.2 Rear side of the testing unit

Figure 2-9: Rear side of the testing unit

(1) Data communications connector (IOIOI)

Not normally used.(2) Electricity caution mark

(3) Video output connector ( )

Connected to a screen-output device such as a monitor, to check the image from the CCD

camera.

(4) Data communications connector ( )

Connected to the Data Processing Unit via the accessory cable.(5) Fuse holder

The fuse is connected here.

(6) Main power connector

Connected to the power socket via the accessory cable.

WARNINGIf touching the connector, discharge static electricity by touching any groundedmetal before starting to operate it. Otherwise, there is the risk of permanentdamage to the units.

(7)

(6) Main power connector

(5) Fuse holder

(4) Data communications

connector ( )

(3) Video output connector ( )

(2)

(1) Data communications connector (IOIOI)

(13) Overflow drain nipple(OVERFLOW)

(12) Waste-solution drain nipple

(WASTE)

(11) Sheath liquid aspiration

nipple (SHEATH LIQUID)(10) Vacuum supply nipple (VACUUM)

(9) Pressure supply nipple (PRESSURE)

(8) Pneumatic unit control output connector(PU CONTROL)





(7)

(8) Pneumatic unit control output connector (PU CONTROL)

Connected to the pneumatic unit control input connector via the accessory cable.

(9) Pressure supply nipple (PRESSURE)

Connected to the pressure supply nipple of the pneumatic unit.

(10)Vacuum supply nipple (VACUUM)

Connected to the vacuum supply nipple of the pneumatic unit.

(11)Sheath liquid aspiration nipple (SHEATH LIQUID)

Connected to the sheath liquid and rinse fluid.

(12)Waste-solution drain nipple (WASTE)

Drains the waste solution. Connected to the drain hole or the waste-solution container.

(13)Overflow drain nipple (OVERFLOW)

Drains fluid that overflows from the reagent chamber.

WARNING• To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power cord before changing the fuse.

Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock.• Replace only with fuse of the specified type and current ratings. Otherwise, the

instrument could give off smoke.





9.3 Pneumatic unit

Front

Figure 2-10: Front of the pneumatic unit

(1) 0.22 MPa pressure regulator

This regulator adjusts the pressure supplied to the testing unit to 0.22 MPa.

(2) Pilot lamp

Lights when the pneumatic unit power is switched on.

(2) Pilot lamp

(1) 0.22 MPa pressure regulator





Rear

Figure 2-11: Rear of the pneumatic unit

(1) Pressure output nipple

Supplies pressure to the testing unit. Connected to the pressure supply nipple of the testing unit.

(2) Vacuum output nipple

Supplies vacuum pressure to the testing unit. Connected to the vacuum supply nipple of the

testing unit.

(3) Fuse

This is a time-lag fuse for 250 V, 4 A. Do not connect any fuse that does not match this rating.

(4) Power connector

Supplies power via the accessory power cord.

(5) Pneumatic unit control input connector

This connector is used to send signals from the testing unit to turn the pneumatic unit on and

off. Connects to the pneumatic unit control output connector the testing unit.

WARNING• To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power cord before changing the fuse.

Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock.• Replace only with fuse of the specified type and current ratings. Otherwise, the

instrument could give off smoke.

Specifications Product code Name Type

117 V-type 266-5011-3 Fuse 250V, 4A ST4-4A-N1 Time lag

220/240 V-type 266-5293-0 Fuse 250V, 3.15A, No.19195 Time lag

Table 2-6: Fuse rating

(1) Pressure output nipple

(2) Vacuum output nipple

(3) Fuse

(4) Power connector

(5) Pneumatic unit control input connector





10. Disposal

Disposal procedures should meet the requirement of all applicable local regulations.

In EU countries, when you dispose this equipment based on EU directive, 2002/96/EC, please

contact your dealer or local Sysmex representative.

The symbol indicated in the back panel is meaning separate collection in accordance

with the EU directive, 2002/96/EC.

When the system was using particle sheath, it has not drained even if shutdown procedure was

done. Drain particle sheath according to the following procedures before the instrument is disposed.

If the system was using alcohol, it has drained by doing shutdown procedure. Do not need to do this

procedure.

1 Select [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Sheath Liquid exchange]. The following dialog will be

displayed. Click on the [Run] button.

Figure 2-12: [Replace Sheath Liquid] dialog

2 When the sheath liquid has been discharged from inside the instrument, the following dialog

appears. Turn off the testing unit.

Figure 2-13: [Cleaning Pressure Settings] dialog





3 Click on the [Run] button. The following dialog appears, then Click on the button.

Figure 2-14: [Sheath Liquid Replacement Sequence] dialog

4 Error History screen is displayed. Click on the [Close] button.

Figure 2-15: [Error History] screen

5 Select [File] - [Exit]. The following dialog is displayed. Click on the [Yes] button, then the

analysis program ends.

Figure 2-16: [End of Data Management Unit] dialog



Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

Chapter 3 PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING

1. Items to be checked before turning on the device....................................... 3-11.1 Reagents...............................................................................................3-1

1.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer)..........................................3-11.3 Instrument inspection ............................................................................ 3-1

2. Turning on the device..................................................................................3-2

3. Starting the analysis program and background check ................................3-33.1 Starting the analysis program ...............................................................3-33.2 Sheath liquid replacement..................................................................... 3-53.3 Background Check................................................................................ 3-73.4 Auto Focusing ....................................................................................... 3-9

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING


1. Items to be checked before turning on the device

1.1 Reagents

1 Check that there is a sufficient amount of reagent for the scheduled tests.

Get a replacement reagent ready if there is not enough reagent.

2 Refer to Chapter 2, 8. Reagents, for the reagents that can be used as sheath liquid.

1.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer)

When outputting the test results to a printer, check that the amount of printer paper is sufficient.

1.3 Instrument inspection

Check the tube and cable connections. Specifically, check that the connectors are firmly connected

and the tubes are not bent.

CAUTION

• Do not use a reagent that has passed its expiry date. The expiry date of each

reagent is written on the label of the container or on the box. Once the packageis opened, the contents must be consumed within 60 days.

• Leave the reagent container at room temperature before use. Use the reagentat 15–30°C.

• If there is a chance that the reagent might have frozen, leave it to reach roomtemperature, then shake the container well to homogenize the solution. Beforeusing the solution, make sure that there are no bubbles. Ignoring any of theabove precautions may result in inaccurate test results.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2. Turning on the device

1 Testing Unit

Turn on the testing unit, referring to the diagram below.

Figure 3-1: Turning on the Testing Unit

2 MonitorSwitch on the power to the monitor as described in the manual for that monitor.

3 Data Processing Unit

Switch on the power to the unit as described in the manual for that PC.

When the data processing unit is turned on, Windows starts up.

NOTE: The power supply for the pneumatic unit is turned on automatically after the main unitpower is turned on and the FPIA-3000 application logon operation is complete.

Power switch





3. Starting the analysis program and background check

The FPIA-3000/3000S uses rights management to limit its users. Refer to Chapter 13, USER

AUTHENTICATION for more on setting logon IDs and passwords etc.

3.1 Starting the analysis program

1 Double click on the FPIA-3000/3000S shortcut on the Windows desktop.

The logon dialog box appears.

2 Enter the logon ID and password, as in table 3-1, then press the [OK] button.

Figure 3-2: [Logon] dialog

NOTE: If the FPIA-3000/3000S does not start, use one of the methods below to start it.• Click through Windows taskbar – [Start] button – [Programs] – [Sysmex] – [FPIA-

3000].• Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.

Set Items

Logon ID Enter the previously assigned logon ID.For details on input text format etc., refer to Chapter 13, USER

AUTHENTICATION .

Password Enter the previously assigned password.The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks “*”.For details on input text format etc., refer to Chapter 13, USER

AUTHENTICATION .

[Start Testing Unit?]check box

When there is no need to start up the testing unit, for example when justreferencing data, put a check in “No (PC Only)”.

[OK] button This starts up the analysis program.

[Cancel] button Cancel FPIA-3000/3000S startup.

Table 3-1: Logon screen items

NOTE: The logon ID and password are case sensitive.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





NOTE: Use this for reference when logging in for the first time after the FPIA-3000/3000Sapplication is installed.

• General user password registrationWhen installing, use the following for reference and set user name and password. Beaware that only the login with administrator group authority allows you to set apassword.

1) Select [Settings] – [User Authentication] – [User Registration] and execute.2) Press the [Add] button on the user information tab and set the logon ID and

password here. For the more detailed procedure, refer to Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION .

• System administrator password registrationThis system is set at the factory with the following registered as the logon ID for thedefault administrator group.

Logon ID: admin

Password: admin

The following logon IDs are also registered as defaults.

Logon ID: guestPassword: guest

Logon ID: managerPassword: manager

Use [Settings] – [User Authentication] – [User Registration] to make changes asappropriate.(Log on with Logon ID: Admin and Password: Admin, create the logon user with theadministrator group, logon again with the logon user you just created, then change the

password etc. above.)

When you start up the FPIA-3000/3000S, the Windows logon ID appears in the [LogonID] field of the logon dialog box.Registering the same ID with the Windows logon ID saves entering the ID when youstart up the FPIA-3000/3000S.

CAUTION[Setting] button• Setting button is only available when the HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS

UNIT or the DARK FIELD UNIT is mounted.• Refer to Appendix H, HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL

(OPTION) and Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL for detailsof each unit.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





3.2 Sheath liquid replacement

If the sheath liquid is PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

The following dialog box will appear and the startup process will be executed.

When the startup process is complete, the system enters standby mode.

Figure 3-3: [Startup Sequence] dialog

If the sheath liquid is not PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

When any other sheath fluid than PARTICLE SHEATH was connected in the previous shutting

down, FPIA-3000/3000S was turned OFF after the sheath fluid inside unit is completely

exhausted for the safety reason.

The following dialog box will appear:

Press to change sheath liquid.A list of sheath liquid options is displayed, so select the one to use.

Figure 3-4: [Startup Settings] dialog





2 Connect the sheath liquid to be used to the sheath liquid aspiration nipple.

Figure 3-5: sheath liquid replacement

3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath liquid aspiration nipple, then press the

[Run] button. The following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 3-6: [Cleaning Pressure Settings] dialog

4 Set the rinse pressure to match the sheath liquid used.

When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (Refer to Chapter 14, Adjustment

of rinse pressure)

The startup process runs.

CAUTION:• After switching the instrument power on, wait for at least one hour for its internal

temperature to stabilize.• Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the

procedure on the next page to run a background error check and auto focus.

sheath liquid aspiration nipple

Connect to sheath liquid container

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





3.3 Background Check

1 After checking the sheath liquid to be used, the dialog in Figure 3-7 is displayed.

To carry out a background check here, press the [Run] button.

Figure 3-7: [Start Background Test] dialog

2 A background check is run automatically, and the results are displayed as shown below.

Figure 3-8: [Background Check Results] screen

3 Press the [Run] button to repeat the background check or the [Cancel] button to end

background checking.





To skip the background check and execute it later, press [Cancel] button in the dialog in

Figure 3-7. The background check is skipped. To execute a background check later, execute

[Test] – [Test]. Figure 3-9 is displayed.

Here, press the [Check Background] button of the [Testing/Analysis Parameters]

dialog.

The dialog in Figure 3-7 is displayed, so press the [Run] button, and execute the backgroundcheck with the procedure from 2 on.

(If you cancel the background check, the system moves immediately to the automatic focus

adjustment.)

Figure 3-9: [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog

The allowable background values within which the accuracy of the FPIA-3000 is guaranteed are

listed below.

NOTE: • Standard background check valuesThe numbers of particles detected in the HPF (High Power Field) and the LPF (LowPower Field) are counted.

Measurement mode Allowable limits (count)

HPF 10

LPF 10

Table 3-2: Allowable ranges for background values





3.4 Auto Focusing

1 After the background check is finished, the dialog in Figure 3-10 is displayed. To adjust the

focus automatically, press the [Run] button.

Figure 3-10: [Start Focus Ajustment] dialog

2 The auto focus pre-processing sequence is executed. After a while, the following dialog will be

displayed. Load the adjustment sample now.

Figure 3-11: [Auto Focus Sequence] dialog

3 Dispense 5ml of a sample prepared to focus adjusting particle into the sample chamber, as

instructed by the action message.

4 Press the [Start] button.The focus is adjusted automatically.

After focus adjustment, a check test is run automatically using the same sample.

5 After the test is complete, a record of automatic focus adjustment is generated and the system

returns to the ready state.

NOTE: For focus adjusting particle, refer to Appendix F, FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE .

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





To skip the auto focus adjustment and execute it later, press [Cancel] button in the dialog in Figure

3-10. You can adjust the auto focus later.

To adjust the auto focus later, execute [Test] – [Test]. Figure 3-12 is displayed. Here, press the

[Auto Focus] button of the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog. The dialog in Figure 3-10

is displayed, so adjust the auto focus with the procedure from 2 onward.





Chapter 4 TESTING

1. Test flow ...................................................................................................... 4-1

2. Check instrument status.............................................................................. 4-2

3. Test information setting ............................................................................... 4-43.1 Sample information setting.................................................................... 4-43.2 SOP setting ........................................................................................... 4-53.3 Measurement condition settings ........................................................... 4-63.4 Analysis conditions................................................................................ 4-83.5 Setting instrument conditions ................................................................4-9

4. Test procedure .......................................................................................... 4-114.1 Preparing a sample ............................................................................. 4-114.2 Testing a sample.................................................................................4-12

5. Display of analysis results ......................................................................... 4-14

6. Shutting down (turning off the power) ....................................................... 4-15

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


1. Test flow

Figure 4-1: Test flow

means the job is to be performed by the operator.

means the job is to be performed by the device.

Turning on the device (page 3-2)

Changing the sheath liquid (page 3-5)

Startup process

Waiting for the internal

temperature to stabilize

Background check (page 3-7)

Auto Focusing (page 3-9)

Setting the analysis information

Checking the STATUS lamp is lit

(page 4-4)

(page 4-2)

Pressing the [Start test] button (page 4-12)

Auto rinse

Installing the sample

Pressing the [Start] button

(page 4-13)

(page 4-13)

Test

Auto rinsing

Displaying the results

Reanalyzing the results

Shutting down the device (page 4-15)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


3 Select [Test]–[Test].

The [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.

4 Check that the status for each unit is green.

The statuses will not all turn green unless the background check, auto focus adjustment, etc. are

executed.


5 If the status is red, take appropriate action, using the following as reference.

Status in dialog Reason displayed Page reference

Next to the [CheckBackground] button, “NotTested” is displayed in red.

This is displayed if nobackground check has beenexecuted since the testingunit power was switched ON.

Press the [Check Background] buttonin the dialog and execute thebackground check.

Next to the [Auto Focus]button, “Not Tested” isdisplayed in red.

This is displayed if the autofocus has not been adjustedsince the testing unit powerwas switched ON.

Press the [Auto Focus] button in thedialog and start the auto focusadjustment sequence. For details onhow to adjust the sample for auto focusadjustment and how to load it into thedevice, refer to page 3-9 in Chapter 3.

Next to the [Pneumatic Unit]button, “Sleeping” isdisplayed in red.

This is displayed if thepneumatic unit is OFF.

Refer to page 14-1 in Chapter 14 andmake the pneumatic unit run.

Next to the [Replace SheathLiquid] button, the name ofthe sheath liquid is displayedin red and under the [Autofocus] button, “Differentsheath liquid loaded indevice” is displayed in yellow.

This is displayed if the sheathliquid selected in SOPregistration with the [Testing/Analysis Parameters]dialog and the sheath liquidcurrently loaded in the testingunit are different.

Replace the sheath liquid with the oneset for the SOP measurement.Alternatively, change the measurementconditions for the SOP settings in the[Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialogand measure with the SOP setting listbox not set.

Table 4-1: Points to check when status is red.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


3. Test information setting

3.1 Sample information setting

Enter information on the samples, as described below.

Figure 4-5: Sample Information

1 Enter the Sample Name.

Sample names can be entered in either of the two ways below.

1) Enter the sample group name in the text box.

Up to 50 characters can be entered.2) Click on , then select the desired sample group name from the displayed list of the latest ten

names.

2 Enter the Sample Type.

Enter the sample group type in the text box.

Up to 50 characters can be entered.

3 Enter the Sample Number.

Enter the sample number in the text box.

If the setting for [Sample number increment] of [System Parameters] is set to [Apply],

the last digit of sample numbers will be incremented automatically after every test. Up to 50

characters can be entered.

4 Enter Comments.

Enter comments in the text box.




TESTING


3.2 SOP setting

Set SOP, as described below. Setting SOP makes it possible to set the various measurement data in

a batch. For SOP meanings etc., refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS .

Figure 4-6: SOP Setting

1 Click , the select the SOP to use from the displayed list.

The setting items listed below are set to the content saved in the selected SOP.

- Testing Parameters

- Analysis Parameters

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


3.3 Measurement condition settings

Test conditions can be set when [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] is checked.

Set measurement conditions, as described below.

Figure 4-7: Testing Parameters

1 Click for [Sheath Liquid], then select the sheath liquid to use from the list displayed.

2 Click for [Magnification], then select the test mode to use from the three types displayed.

HPF test mode: Testing will be conducted in the high power field (20×) test mode.

Measure with a fixed analysis amount of approximately 0.35 µl.

LPF test mode: Testing will be conducted in the low power field (5×

) test mode.Measure with a fixed analysis amount of approximately 5.5 µl.

LPF→HPF test mode: When you load one sample into the sample chamber, one

measurement is made in low magnification ratio mode, then

automatically measurement is made in high magnification ratio

mode.

3 Select the count type from the two below.

Stop by Count: Testing continues until the count reaches the set value.

Up to 360,000 can be set.

Stop by time: In quantity count mode, the dispensed sample can be automatically

measured repeatedly.

Input the number of repetitions for measurement in “Repeat Times”.

The maximum number of repetitions is 20.

4 Set the number of automatic measurement repetitions for [Requested Number ] or [Repeat

Times]. The first reagent supplied to the instrument is used for measurement.

CAUTION• When a sample of high specific gravity is tested, differences in the precipitation

speeds of particles may mean that the measurement results vary with greaternumbers of samples.

• Results obtained in and after the second repetition are not guaranteed.



TESTING


NOTE: If you select [Apply] in [Testing Parameters] - [Auto Merge] on the SOP Settingsdialog, and use repeat measurement on Stop by Time method, measured records will bemerged automatically and merge recode will be generated when all repeatmeasurement finished.

CAUTIONWhen running repeated tests, check the remaining volumes of reagents beforestarting each test. If an error such as insufficient reagent occurs during a test, thatand subsequent tests will be invalid.

NOTE: How to cancel auto repeat measurement• Select [Test] – [Cancel Repeat Tests].

Then the following message appears.

Figure 4-8: [Repeat Testing] dialog

• Click on the [OK] button to abort auto repeat measurement.Auto repeat measurement will stop before the measurement after next.

Also, to stop measurement immediately, select [Test] – [Cancel Test].Then the following message appears.

Figure 4-9: [Testing in progress] dialog

When you press the [OK] button, measurement is stopped immediately. (Depending onthe timing, measurement may be stopped at the start of the next measurement.)



TESTING


3.4 Analysis conditions

Analysis conditions can be set when [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] is checked.

Set analysis conditions, as described below.

Figure 4-10: Analysis Parameters

1 Click for [Size Parameter ], then select the particle diameter to set from the list displayed.

Refer to Chapter 16, Particle diameter parameters for more information on particle diameters.

2 Click on and under [Size Parameter ] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for the

diameter.

3 Click for [Shape Parameters], then select the particle form to set from the list displayed.

Refer to Chapter 16, Form parameters for more information on particle forms.

4 Click on and under [Shape Parameters] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for the

form.

5 Click on and under [Cumulative(%)] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for

cumulative frequency.

Values can also be entered directly from the keyboard.

The diameter or form for the point at which the cumulative frequency reaches the set value is

displayed.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


6 Click on and under [Dilution Ratio] to enter the ratio.

Values can also be entered directly from the keyboard.

When the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is converted to the pre-dilution value and

displayed.

3.5 Setting instrument conditions

Set instrument conditions, as described below.

Figure 4-11: Testing Parameters

CAUTION

If you click [Set Detail] button and select [Analyze] in [Testing Parameters] -

[Merge(LPF+HPF)] on the Testing Detail Parameters dialog, size parameter canbe selected from only CE diameter (number base, area base, and volume base).After this measurement, recodes (the measurement mode of which is aMerge(LPF+HPF)) which are from LPF measurement result recode, HPFmeasurement result, and Merge(LPF+HPF) mode will be generated. refer toChapter 16, FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION about full range.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


1 Click on the [Set Detail] button.

The [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog appears.

Figure 4-12: [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog

2 Set the setting values as required.

Scroll the list up and down to display the item you want to change. Move the mouse to the value

field for the item you want to change, then left click. It becomes possible either to select from a list

box for that value area or to change the value directly. Here, change the item or change the value.

After the change, when you press [Close], the measurement parameter is changed.NOTE: Refer to Appendix C for the meanings of setting values.

CAUTIONIf you change a measurement condition with the “Edit Testing/AnalysisParameters” check box in the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog checked,the inside of the SOP setting selection list box in the SOP settings turns white andSOP is deselected. If you measure in this state, measurement uses the currentsettings not the existing SOP conditions. If you want to re-analyze themeasurement results with the existing SOP conditions, refer to Chapter 5,2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


4. Test procedure

4.1 Preparing a sample

When you prepare a sample, pay attention to the following.

Particle diameter

Are the particles to be tested within the testable particle-diameter range of the device

(1.5–160 µm)?

Specific gravity

Is the specific gravity of the particles to be tested 4 or lower?

Stability

Do the particles to be tested not melt or expand in PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol?

Characterization of aggregation

Do the particles to be tested not aggregate beyond the testable range of the devicein PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol?

Test starts

If aggregation occurs after aspiration, the sample gets clogged inside thedevice, causing malfunction of the device.



TESTING


4.2 Testing a sample

1 After preparing the sample to test, press the [Start] button on the [Testing/Analysis

Parameters] screen.


After processing of the previous sequence is complete, the following dialog appears, and theTesting Unit cover opens automatically.

Figure 4-14: [Measurement Sequence] dialog

CAUTIONWhen measuring highly adhesive particles or samples with high particleconcentrations, check to make sure that there is no carryover. Ordinary rinsingmay not be sufficient. When there is carryover, perform the automatic rinsingsequence. (Refer to Chapter 15, Auto rinse.)

CAUTIONFor safety’s sake, do not open or close the cover by hand.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TESTING


2 Dispense 5 ml of the prepared sample into the testing unit sample chamber, and press the [Start]

button. The cover closes automatically, and measurement starts.

Figure 4-15: Setting the sample to be tested

3 After the test is finished, the Record List is updated to display the latest analysis results.

WARNING• Keep your hands clear of the moving cover. There is a potential to get injured.• Be careful not to touch the moving agitator. There is a potential to get injured.



TESTING


5. Display of analysis results

1 Select the [Record List] tab.

2 After selecting the record to display, select the tab for the intended display method. The test

results will be displayed.

Figure 4-16: Test Results Record List screen

In the [Record List], double click on the sample to display. The analysis results screen opens.

Figure 4-17: Analysis Results screen

Valid Count

Valid Count



TESTING


6. Shutting down (turning off the power)

1 Select [File] – [Exit].

The following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 4-18: [Shutdown] dialog

2 Click on the [ Yes] button.

The dialog below appears, and the shutdown process runs.

Figure 4-19: [Shutdown Sequence] dialog

3 The testing unit cover opens, so add 10 mL of RO water to the sample chamber and then click

the [OK] button.

If particle sheath is being used as the sheath liquid, after the shutdown operations end, the testingunit cover opens, so dispense 10 ml of RO water into the sample chamber, then switch OFF the

testing unit power. If you are using a sheath liquid other than particle sheath, the testing unit

cover does not open. Also, it is not necessary to dispense the RO water.

NOTE: The effective analyzed number which is entered to the FPIA-3000 will be shown inmeasurement count area per 1 second. In Stop by Time mode, count number will bereset to 0 by repeating. However, Stop by count always indicates whole count number.

NOTE: Shut down the testing unit and the data processing section. After shutdown, the dataprocessing section automatically ends its program.



TESTING


4 Once the sequence is completed, the following dialog appears.

Turn off the testing unit.

When you press the [OK] button, the analysis program ends.

Figure 4-20: [Shutdown Procedure] dialog

5 Exit from Windows.

6 Turn OFF the data processing unit power switch.

7 If a sheath liquid other than particle sheath is being used, close the sheath liquid container cover

and store in the storage location. Also, dispose of waste liquid in the container.




Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING

1. Record Display and Processing .................................................................. 5-11.1 Processing the record list...................................................................... 5-1

1.2 Screen composition............................................................................... 5-11.3 Explanation of functions ........................................................................5-21.4 Sort functions ........................................................................................ 5-71.5 The filter function................................................................................... 5-91.6 Search functions .................................................................................5-111.7 Display reset .......................................................................................5-131.8 Sample information revision................................................................5-141.9 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-151.10 Deletion .............................................................................................5-161.11 Merging records ................................................................................5-161.12 Copying to the clipboard ................................................................... 5-17

1.13 Changing the record display .............................................................5-172. Processing analysis results .......................................................................5-18

2.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-182.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-182.3 Moving records.................................................................................... 5-202.4 Thumbnail image display .................................................................... 5-212.5 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-222.6 Selection particle save ........................................................................5-342.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen........................... 5-34

3. Particle image list ...................................................................................... 5-35

3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-353.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-353.3 Copying to the clipboard .....................................................................5-363.4 Detailed information display ................................................................ 5-37

4. Frequency tables....................................................................................... 5-38

4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-384.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-384.3 Copying to the clipboard .....................................................................5-38

5. Multi Scattergrams ....................................................................................5-395.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-39

5.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-395.3 Copying to clip board .......................................................................... 5-395.4 View settings....................................................................................... 5-405.5 Image ..................................................................................................5-405.6 Image (Reference) ..............................................................................5-40

6. Graph (Overlay-View)................................................................................ 5-406.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-406.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-41

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




6.3 Copying to the clipboard ......................................................................5-416.4 Setting up display ................................................................................5-41

7. Meta Data ..................................................................................................5-427.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-427.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-42

7.3 Copying to the clipboard ......................................................................5-42

8. Detail Results.............................................................................................5-438.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-438.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-438.3 Copying to the clipboard ......................................................................5-43

9. Graph (Trend-View) ...................................................................................5-449.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-449.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-449.3 Copying to the clipboard ......................................................................5-459.4 Setting up display ................................................................................5-45

10. The File menu..........................................................................................5-4510.1 File menu items .................................................................................5-4510.2 New....................................................................................................5-4610.3 Open..................................................................................................5-4710.4 Import.................................................................................................5-4810.5 Save ..................................................................................................5-5010.6 Printing...............................................................................................5-5210.7 PDF Print ...........................................................................................5-5310.8 CSV export ........................................................................................5-5510.9 Transmission to the host....................................................................5-56

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING


1. Record Display and Processing

1.1 Processing the record list

Of the stored data displays, this section explains the [Record List] screen.

The [Record List] screen displays test result data for each record. The display is updated and

added to every time the data is reanalyzed. There is a limit of 1,000 on the number of records that

can be stored in one database.

When automatic deletion is set to [Apply] with [Settings] – [System Parameters] –

[System] – [Record Operations], when the number of records goes over 1000, those with the

oldest measurement dates are automatically deleted.

If automatic deletion is set to [Not Apply], when the number of measurement repetitions is set in

the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog, if the sum of the measurement result records

already in the database plus the number of measurements to be made now exceeds 1000, the

“Cannot measure. Exceeds maximum number of records” dialog is displayed and the measurement

is not possible. In this case, delete enough records to make the new measurements possible.

1.2 Screen composition

The screen displayed when the [Record List] tab is selected is as shown below.

The [Record List] screen is displayed immediately after logon.

Figure 5-1: [Record List] screen

NOTE: Record: This is the name for a unit containing the data from one test.

Maximize button





1.3 Explanation of functions

(1) Functions of buttons on the [Record List] screen

(2) Menu > Record processing

(3) Navigation to other screens (when one record is selected)

If you left click a record with the mouse on the record list screen, that record is displayed inverted

in blue and that record is selected.

Double click on the record to display the [Analysis Results] screen. Click on a tab on the screen

to display the next screen, which will display the content of the selected record on the

corresponding screen.

• Analysis Results screen

• Particle Image List screen• Frequency Table screen

• Meta Data screen

• Detailed Results screen

• Multi Scattergrams screen

• Graph(Overlay-View) screen

• Graph (Trend-View) screen

NOTE: When the maximize button in the FPIA-3000 window, a List screen can be displayed onthe CRT in the maximal size. When the maximize button is repressed, the display showsthe original screen.

Item Functions

Reset Display Cancels sorting and filtering settings, searches etc. and returns the screen tothe default display.

Search Search for records.

Sort Set the sorting method.

Filter Set the filtering method.

Table 5-1: [Record List] screen items

Item Functions

Select all Selects all the records.

Corresct SampleInformation

Revise sample information within the record information.

Reanalyze Select records and reanalyze them as a batch.

Delete Delete the selected record.

Merge Merge the selected record.

Table 5-2: [Record List] screen items





(4) Navigation to other screens (when multiple records are selected)

Multiple records can be selected using the mouse and keyboard. Click on multiple non-contiguous

records while holding down the Ctrl key to select them. The mouse can also be dragged across

multiple contiguous records to select them all. The selected records are highlighted in reversed

color. To cancel the selections, release the keyboard Ctrl key and select another record.

After selecting multiple records, clicking a tab on the screen, and displaying the [AnalysisResults] screen, [Particle Image list], [Frequency Table], meter data, or [Details Results]

screen, of the records selected on the record screen, the one displayed at the top is the one whose

contents are displayed. When a [Graph (Trend-View)] screen, [Multi Scattergrams] screen,

or [Graph (Overlay-View)] is displayed, the graph is drawn or the scattergram or the like

displayed using the contents of the selected records.

(5) Fixed display of column items

The column items that are always displayed on the [Record List] screen can be fixed in position.

For the procedure to set column positions, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View settings – Record list .

(6) Selection of column display itemsThe column items to be displayed and hidden on the [Record List] screen can be set, as well as

their alignment. For the procedure to set column positions, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View settings –

Record list .

(7) Change display item width

The widths of columns that are displayed on the [Record list] screen can be altered. Left click on

the column to change, and drag the pointer left and right to change to the desired width.

(8) Record data display contents

The following information is displayed in the list. The default is to display those items with o in the

default display column.

Displaycontents

Detailed item Defaultdisplay

Explanation

RecordInformation

Record Number O This is a unique number for each measurement resultrecord.

Tested O This is the date and time of the measurement.

Reanalyzed O This is the date and time of the reanalysis.

Re Analysis Checked if the data was reanalyzed.

Transmitted Checked if the record has been sent to the host.

Printed Checked if the record has been printed out.

Error Checked if an error occurred that affected themeasurement data.

External Save Checked if the record was stored externally.

Table 5-3: List Item Display Items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





UserInformation

Measure name O The logged-in user name at the time of themeasurement is displayed.

Re Analyzed By The logged-in user name at the time of the reanalysis

is displayed.SampleInformation

Sample name O The name of the sample set at the time ofmeasurement is displayed.

Sample number O The number of the sample set at the time ofmeasurement is displayed.

Sample Type The type of the sample set at the time ofmeasurement is displayed.

Comment The comment concerning the sample information setat the time of measurement is displayed.

TestingParameters

OLens O lens information used in the measurement isdisplayed.

*For details of the O lens, refer to Appendix H, HIGH/ LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL(OPTION).

Light fieldsystem

O Light field system information used in themeasurement is displayed.*For details of the Light filed system, refer to Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL.

SOP O The SOP group name set at the time of themeasurement is displayed.

Magnification O The measurement mode (LPF/HPF/LPF→HPF) at thetime of measurement is displayed.

Count method O The count technique (total count/quantity count) at thetime of measurement is displayed.

Selection dataSave

Checked if this record is data saved (see 2.6Selection particle save)

Merge data Checked if this record is merged data(see 1.11Merging records)

AnalyzedResults

Density O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Selected (%) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Small (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.Middle (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.

Large (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Displaycontents


Explanation


http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Particles Detected (#) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Analyzed (#) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.Selected (#) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.

CE Diameter (N) Statisticalanalysis items (*)

O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Circularity Statisticalanalysis items (*)

O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

CE Diameter (A) Statisticalanalysis items (*)

For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

CE Diameter (V) Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Max. Distance Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Norm to maxdist

Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Length Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Width Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Feret HDiameter



Feret VDiameter Statisticalanalysis items (*) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Martin HDiameter



Martin VDiameter



Krumbein HDiameter



Krumbein VDiameter



PE Diameter Statistical

analysis items (*)

For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.

Area (pixels) Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Perimeter Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Displaycontents


Explanation


http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Area Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Convex Hull

Perimeter

Statistical

analysis items (*)

For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display

items.Convex HullArea



Intensity mean Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Intensity SD Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Feret AspectRatio



Area / Box Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Aspect Ratio(W/L)



Elongation Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Aspect Ratio(max dist)



Convexity Statisticalanalysis items (*)


Solidity Statisticalanalysis items (*)


HS Circularity Statisticalanalysis items (*) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of displayitems.

Major axis Statisticalanalysis items (*)


User-defineditem 1

For the contents, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OFSYSTEM SETTINGS.

User-defineditem 2


User-defineditem 3


User-defined

item 4

For the contents, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF

SYSTEM SETTINGS.

User-defineditem 5


User-defineditem 6


Displaycontents


Explanation


http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





1.4 Sort functions

Test data can be sorted into ascending or descending order based on key parameters. To sort by a

single key, click on the [Record List] screen. To sort by multiple keys, click the [Sort] button on

the [Record List] Screen. Either method determines the sort conditions. Sorting can also be used

together with the filter function (Refer to Chapter 5, 1.5 The filter function).

Single key

Records are sorted according to one key. The operation procedure is as described below.

1Click on the column title in the [Record List] screen that is to serve as the key.The records are sorted.

Click again to sort in the reverse order.

Figure 5-2: Single key sort

User-defineditem 7


User-defined

item 8

For the contents, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF

SYSTEM SETTINGS.User-defineditem 9


User-defineditem 10


(*) There are seven statistical analysis items: Average, mode, significant deviation, coefficient ofvariation, lower value, 50% value, and upper value.

NOTE: • Ascending order: 3-2-1 is reordered to 1-2-3.• Descending order: 1-2-3 is reordered to 1-2-3.

Displaycontents


Explanation


http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Multiple keys

Records are sorted according to up to three keys.

1 Press the [Sort] button on the [Record List] screen.

The [Sort] dialog appears.

Figure 5-3: Multiple key sort

2 Select the basis columns from the lists for First Key – Third Key.The lists display the column items that are displayed on the [Record List] screen.

3 Select [Ascending] or [Descending] for each key.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The records are sorted as specified.

Item Functions

Reset The items that have been set are cleared.

First key Set the columns that will be the basis of the sort when it is executed.

Second key

Third key

Ascending/Descending

Set the order of sorting with reference to the keys that are the basis of sorting.

Table 5-4: [Sort] dialog screen items

NOTE: If Sort is set by the [Sort] button, the [Sort] button will be displayed in green color.This sort function can be used with filter function.





1.5 The filter function

When the key item is set, this function can be used to extract and display only records which

correspond to that key item.

1 Press the [Filter ] button on the [Record List] screen.

The [Filter ] dialog appears.

Figure 5-4: [Filter ] dialog

NOTE: • When filtering is set, the [Filter ] button is displayed green.

• The filter function and sort function can be used in combination.





Item Detailed item Functions

Select Filters Check to use filtering.

Date Check to use the test date as a filtering condition.

Today Check to specify dates up to today corresponding withthe Windows system date.

Date Check to specify the start date and end date.

Detector and SOP Detector OLens can be selected from OLensUnit 5X, 10X and20X. Light field system (Bright field/Dark field) isselectable only when the OLens Unit 10X is selected.

SOP Only the registered SOP can be selectable.

Reagent name Reagent name which is set in Testing/AnalysisParameters Dialog can be selected.

Power Field Power Field(HPF,LPF,LPF->HPF) which is set inTesting/Analysis Parameters Dialog can be selected.

Count method Count method(Stop by count,Stop by Time) which is set

in Testing/Analysis Parameters Dialog can be selected.

Reanalysis Check to specify by the data attributes of test data.

Tested Data Check to specify test data.

Reanalyzed Data Check to specify reanalyzed test data.

Testing Status Check to specify by test status.

Normal Check to specify tests with normal samples.

Error Check to specify only samples with test errors.

Report Status Check to specify by test result.

Reported Check to specify only data for which test results havebeen printed out.

Not Reported Check to specify data for which test results have notbeen printed out.

TransmissionStatus

Check to specify by transmission status.

Transmitted Check to specify only data for which test data havebeen transmitted.

No Transmitted Check to specify test data that has not beentransmitted.

Table 5-5: Filtering function items





2 Set the conditions.


The records are extracted and displayed as specified.

1.6 Search functions

Search for any target record from among the items displayed on the [Record List] screen. Search

targets are those for which match from the first character (wild card characters cannot be used). The

search makes a distinction between single-byte and double-byte characters as the input search key.

1 Enter the search string in the [Search] field of the [Record List] screen.

Figure 5-5: Search settings

NOTE: All conditions are [AND] conditions.ExampleTest date specification: Today (Windows system date is 2004/01/01)Detector and SOP - SOP: HPF standardRunning filtering with the above settings extracts and displays only those records for

which the measurement date is 2004/01/01 and the SOP group is HPF Standard.





2 Press the [Search] button.

If there are any matching records, the cursor moves to a highlighted item.

Figure 5-6: Search results

NOTE: • If there are no matching records, the following dialog appears. Please search again.

Figure 5-7: If the search found no matching records

• The cursor moves down from its present position in order, and when the cursor comesto the bottom of the records, the cursor starts searching from the top of the records.





1.7 Display reset

This function resets sorting and filtering result displays and search settings, returning to the default

display.

1 Press the [ResetDisplay] button on the [Record List] screen.

The settings will be reset.

Figure 5-8: [ResetDisplay]





1.8 Sample information revision

The sample information can be revised for selected records.

1 Select [Menu] – [Record] – [Correct Sample Information].

The [Correct Sample Information] dialog will be displayed.

Figure 5-9: [Correct Sample Information] dialog

2 Set the items.

3 Click on the [Correct] button.

The [Confirm Sample Information] dialog will be displayed.

Figure 5-10: [Confirm Sample Information] dialog

4 Click on the [ Yes] button.

The record sample information is corrected.

NOTE: The [Correct Sample Information] dialog can also be called by right clicking on therecord on the [Record List] screen, and selecting [Correct Sample Information] fromthe context menu.

Item Functions

Sample Name Select the registered sample name.

Sample Number Enter the sample No.

Sample Type Enter the sample group type.

Comments Enter a comment.Up to 50 characters can be entered.

[Cancel] button Stops the processing and returns.

Table 5-6: [Correct Sample Information] dialog items

CAUTIONDo not use the symbol of / or \ for the sample name, sample number and sampletype.





1.9 Reanalyze

Selected records can be reanalyzed in a batch.

1 Select [Menu] – [Record] – [Reanalyze].

The [Analysis] dialog will be displayed.

Figure 5-11: [Analysis] Dialog

2 Select the above item. Press the[Analyze] button.A dialog is displayed to confirm that you want to execute reanalysis. To execute, press

[Analyze]; to cancel, press [Cancel].

When you press [Analyze], the specified data is reanalyzed in one batch.

NOTE: The [Analysis] dialog can also be called by right clicking on the record on the [RecordList] screen, and selecting [Analyze] from the context menu.

Item Functions

Combo box The data can be changed to a registered SOP.

Save New(Radio button)

Select if the reanalyzed data is to be saved as new test data when thereanalysis is conducted.

Save (Radio button) Select if the reanalyzed data is to be saved by overwriting when the reanalysisis conducted.

Table 5-7: [Analysis] dialog screen items





1.10 Deletion

Selected records can be deleted. Select beforehand any records you want to delete.

1 Select [Menu] – [Record] – [Delete].

The [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog will appear for the selected data.

Figure 5-12: [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog


The selected data is deleted. Press the [Cancel] button to stop processing and return.

1.11 Merging records

You can merge multiple records.

1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for analysis.

2 Select the [Record] -> [Merge] or right-click on the recode list and select merge.


Figure 5-13: [Setting Sample Information] dialog

NOTE: The [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog can also be called by right clicking on a recordon the [Record List] screen, and selecting [Delete] from the context menu.

Item FunctionsSample Name Select a previously registered sample name or enter a new sample name.


Sample Number Enter the sample No.Up to 50 characters can be entered.When you input the numeric value, it is counted up each time there is ameasurement.

Table 5-8: Merge settings





3 Set the items.


The records are merged with the set content.

Press the [Cancel] button to stop processing and return.

1.12 Copying to the clipboard

Selected records can be copied to the clipboard. Records copied to the clipboard can be pasted into

other application software. String names can also be copied to the clipboard, as record headers.

1 Right click on a record in the [Record List] screen, then select [Copy to clipboard] from the

context menu.

The record is copied to the clipboard.

1.13 Changing the record display

The items displayed in the record list can be changed. For details, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View

settings – Record list .

Sample Type Enter the sample group type information.

Comments Enter a comment.Up to 50 characters can be entered.

CAUTIONData from different Power Field (LPF/HPF) cannot be merged.LPF→HPF (HPF) and HPF are handled as the same mode and LPF→HPF (LPF)and LPF are handled as the same mode.Data with different Count method (total mode/quantity count mode) cannot bemerged.Data reanalyzed from a record cannot be merged with the original record.

NOTE: You can merge select [Menu]-[Recode]-[Merge] after you get analysis result byselecting multiple recodes in record list.

NOTE: Clipboard: An area in main memory (within the PC) used for temporary storage of data.

Item Functions

Table 5-8: Merge settings

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2. Processing analysis results

2.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Analysis Results] screen.

The [Analysis Results] screen displays analysis results for each record that was selected on the[Record list] screen. If multiple records are selected, analysis results are displayed for the

uppermost of the records selected on the [Record List] screen.


Figure 5-14: [Analysis Results] screen

Sample Information

Restricted analysis range

change combo box

Record

selection

Scattergram Test value display area

Particle diameter

Histogram

[Particle diameter

selection] button

[Image] button [Save] button

[Reanalyze] button

[Particle formselection] button

Particle form histogram





Item Functions

Record selection If multiple records are selected, the records are moved.

Sample Information The sample information for the selected record is displayed.

[Image] button The par ticle images for the selected record are displayed.

[Particle diameter(X axis) selection] button

The particle diameter (X axis) for the selected record is selected.

Particle diameter(X axis) Histogram

Displays a histogram with the X axis parameter restricted.

[Reanalyze] button Reanalyze the selected record.

[Cancel] button Cancels the reanalysis. Enabled during reanalysis.

[Save] button The reanalyzed data New / Replace and Selection par ticle Save dialogopen. You can save various data here.

Restricted analysis rangechange combo box

You can change the range for restricted analysis by changing the combobox for specifying the restricted analysis range.

[Particle form(Y axis) selection] button The particle form (Y axis) for the selected record is selected.

Particle form(Y axis) histogram

Displays a histogram with the Y axis parameter restricted.

Scattergram Display restricted analysis Scattergram.

Test value display area The test values for the selected record are displayed.When you press thestandard tab, analysis data and particle form date for the normal particlediameter is displayed. Also, if you press the user defined tab, the userdefined data registered with [Settings] – [SOP] is displayed. For details onhow to set user definitions, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings.When you press the Cumulative Frequency tab, the Cumulative Frequency(X axis) is displayed by 10%. When you right click on the test value display

area, "Copy to clip board" or "View Settings (Result list)" can be selectedand done. If the "View Settings (Result list)" is displayed, you can changethe location of the result list parameter display. For details, refer to Chapter11, 1.3 View settings – Result (List).

Table 5-9: Analysis results screen items

NOTE: User Information items are a function that registers formulas using measured analysisparameters selected by the user and adds the results of calculating the formula to themeasurement record. For further details, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings.

CAUTION • In the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, the [Image] button on the Analysis ResultsScreen is disabled. (Image display function is not provided.) Furthermore, theeffective analyzed number and the selected number are not displayed.

• When the analysis results of the data in the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode aredisplayed, the particle image list tab, the Merge(LPF+HPF) tab and imagesduring multi scattergram cannot be displayed. Also, the particle images cannotbe printed out.

• For details of the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONALDESCRIPTION .

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2.3 Moving records

When multiple records are selected on the [Record List] screen, the displayed records can be

moved.

Figure 5-15: Record move buttons

Item Functions

Display the analysis results for the first record in the list.

Display the analysis results for the record one above the current record.

Display the analysis results for the record one below the current record.

Display the analysis results for the last record in the list.

Table 5-10: Record move button items

NOTE: For each items, refer to Table 5-3 List Item Display Items.





2.4 Thumbnail image display

Press the [Image] button in the [Analysis Results] screen to display the images in the analysis

limit range in the [Particle Image Thumbnails] screen.

Changing the analysis limit conditions in the [Analysis Results] screen refreshes the content of

the thumbnail screen at the same time.

Press the button to minimize the image thumbnail window to an icon.

Press the button to maximize the image thumbnail window.

Press the button to close the window.

Figure 5-16: [Particle Image Thumbnails] dialog





2.5 Reanalyze

You can reanalyze the measurement results with the method below by pressing the [Reanalyze]

button on the [Analysis Results] screen to open the reanalysis screen.

At the right of Figure 5-17 Reanalysis screen, there are the standard tab and enhancing 1-5 tabs.

If you press one of the buttons, following analysis can be done separately.

• You can change the limit axes (X axis, Y axis), which are analysis parameters, and reanalyze.

• You can restrict the limit axis (X axis, Y axis) analysis range to any area you desire and reanalyze.

• You can change the cumulative frequencies for the lower value and upper value of the analysis

results to any desire values and reanalyze.

With the standard button, you can use the mouse to move the restriction area axes (X axis and Y

axis) for the restricted axis particle distribution histogram to specify a rectangular area within the

scattergram and execute an analysis restricted to within that rectangular range. For the concrete

procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range. Also, the results

of this analysis are saved in the measurement record.

With enhancing analyses 1-5, in addition to analysis restricted to a range, you can analyze restrictedto a polygon range by specify the polygon range within the scattergram and executing the restricted

analysis. For the concrete procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5.2. Polygon range limit analysis.

• By selecting a registered SOP, you can reanalyze with the analysis conditions set for that SOP.

• You can register any analysis conditions you want as a new SOP. This means that you can

measure next time under the same conditions if you use prior SOP.

2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range

The [Reanalyze] button on the [Analysis Results] screen can be used to reanalyze test results.

Press the [Cancel] button to interrupt the reanalysis.

You can analysis with various items by pressing the standard button or one of the expansionbuttons, 1-5, in the figure.

NOTE: Polygon range limit analysis is selected by default only Exhancing 5, Reconfigure inDetailed Settings if necessary. For details, see Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEMSETTINGS.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Figure 5-17: Reanalysis screen

Item Functions

[Image] button Image thumbnails of the selected records can be displayed.

[Cancel] button Cancel the analysis.

[Make New SOP] button A new SOP can be made.

[Clear Area] button The preset SOP information area can be cleared.

[Detailed Settings] button The detailed information on the selected SOP can be displayed.

Table 5-11: Functions of reanalysis buttons

CAUTIONWhen you press the tab button such as “Record List” without pressing the“Cancel” button while the analysis is executed, the analyzed data storage dialogwill be displayed. “The reanalyzed data is not saved. Update?” appears. Note thatthe reanalyzed data is not saved and the display goes to each tab screen if youpress the [NO] button here.If you press the [YES] button here, the reanalyzed data will be saved and thedisplay goes to each tab screen.

X-axis particle distribution histogram

Y-axis particle distribution histogram Scattergram display Standard and Analysis 1 – 5 buttons





1) Limit axis (X, Y axis) change and lower (%) value and upper (%) value change

Records can be reanalyzed by pressing the [Reanalyze] button on the [Analysis Results]

screen. Changing the value of the list box of limit axes (X and Y axes) reanalyzes with the

applicable analysis parameters and displays the results.

The limit axis information can be set separately between standard analysis and enhancing analysis 1-5.

By dragging the left side or right side vertical axis of the X-axis particle distribution graph (leftclicking the mouse and moving it) you can move the area limit axes and can limit the range of the

area. (By default, the area outside the limits is grayed out.) The particles inside the area are subject

to analysis.

By dragging the top side or bottom side horizontal axis of the Y-axis particle distribution graph (left

clicking the mouse and moving it), you can move the area limit axes and can limit the range of the

area. (By default, the area outside the limits is grayed out.) The particles inside the area are subject

to analysis.

At this time, the values inside the limited analysis range change combo box change to show the

position of the area limit axes.

You can also change the area limit axis by changing the values in this combo box. In this case, the

limit axis is moved automatically.

Figure 5-18: Limit axis parameter change list box

Limit axis parameter change list box (for X axis)

Limit axis parameter change list box (for Y axis) Restricted analysis range change

combo box





There are items for changing the lower (%) and upper (%) in the particle diameter limit and form

limit columns in the analysis conditions frame.

You can either change value with the buttons or input the new value directly into the edit box.

For explanations of lower (%) and upper (%), refer to Chapter 16, 5.4 Statistical analysis items.

Figure 5-19: Particle Diameter Limit (Size:) and Shape Limit (Shape:) Upper (%) and

Lower (%) Change Box

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2) Change the SOP conditions, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a

new file.

There are three methods for reanalysis.

1) Reanalyze with the existing SOP, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a new

file.

2) Register new SOP conditions, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a newfile.

3) Revise the existing SOP conditions, then carry out analysis.

(1) Reanalyze with the existing SOP, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving

as a new file.

1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for reanalysis.

2 Press the [Analysis Results] tab.

3 Click on the [Reanalyze] button.

The following screen will be displayed.

Figure 5-20: Previously registered SOP selection list box

4 Select existing SOP conditions from [SOP].

Analysis results are reanalyzed under the selected SOP conditions, and the results are displayed.





5 New save: Press the [Save] button.

The [Data storage] dialog is displayed as in the figure below.

Figure 5-21: [Data storage] dialog

6 Select the [New Save], and then press the [Save] button.

The [Setting Sample Information] dialog is displayed as in the figure below.

Figure 5-22: [Setting Sample information] dialog

Input the sample information according to 1.8 Sample information revision.

The reanalyzed data is saved as a new record.


Figure 5-23: [Reanalyzed Data Update] dialog






Reanalyzed date is displayed in the [ReAnalyzed] field for the sample information within the

analysis results.

The logged-on user name is entered in the [Reanalyzed By] field.

Figure 5-24: Sample information

8 Update:After completing 4 , press the [Save] button. The dialog shown in Figure 5-21 will be

displayed.

9 Select Update and press the [Save] button.


Figure 5-25: [Reanalyzed Data Update] dialog


The analysis results data that have been newly selected and reanalyzed according to the SOP

conditions are saved to the same record.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





(2) The data is analyzed according to the new SOP, and the new SOP is registered, then the

analysis results are saved by overwriting or saving as a new file.

1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for analysis.

2 Press the [Analysis Results] tab. Press the [Reanalyze] button.

3 Change analysis conditions, such as particle size distribution limits.[SOP] under [Analysis Parameters] turns white.

Figure 5-26: SOP selection area

4 To make more detailed alterations to the SOP, click on the [Detailed Settings] button under

[Analysis Parameters].The following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 5-27: [Setting Analysis Parameters] dialog

If you place a check in the Particle Analysis checkbox, it also becomes possible to change the

particle analysis parameters. For details on the parameters, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP

settings.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





5 Set the items.

6 After changing the SOP parameters, click on the [Make New SOP] button.


Figure 5-28: [new SOP registration] dialog

7 Enter the SOP name for new registration, then click on the [OK] button.


Figure 5-29: [Registration of New SOP] dialog


Reanalysis will be carried out with the new SOP, and the newly-registered SOP conditions willappear in the SOP list box.

Figure 5-30: Display of Analysis Parameters after SOP registration

When you press the [Save] button to open the data storage dialog, select Update or New and press

the [Save] button, the reanalyzed results are saved.

NOTE: This dialog can be used to set the particle analysis conditions, statistical analysisconditions and limit analysis conditions that are required for the analysis process. TheSOP for test conditions etc. can be changed to other SOP conditions using [Settings] –[SOP settings]. However, these parameters will not have any impact on the analysis.

NOTE: You can save the changed reanalysis conditions or create new records without settingan SOP. In that case, the SOP list box is blank.





When you right click the mouse, the display becomes like Figure 5-33 and you can create a

closed polygon.

Figure 5-33: Creating a polygon with the mouse

Particles surrunded by the polygon are analysed as limited particles, and the result is displayed

in the following result list.

Users can specify the range by the polygon with 15 points.

Figure 5-34: Polygon analysis results listThe polygon vertex clicked with the mouse in the polygon position information is displayed in

the format (X, Y).

Revising the polygon:

To cancel the entire area of the set polygon, press the [ClearArea] button. All the polygon

limit data is cleared.

If you want to revise the polygon range, click the mouse on a vertex. The vertex becomes a

square, as in Figure 5-35.

Display area of analysisresults

Polygon positioninformation

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Figure 5-35: Selecting a polygon range vertex

Bring the mouse to the vertex that has become a square and while holding down the left mouse

button at that location, move the mouse to move the vertex as in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36: Moving a polygon range vertex

Each time the polygon range is changed, the statistics are analyzed and the results are displayed in

the analysis results display area.

CAUTIONWhile the analysis is executed, press the Multi Scattergram tab, the Graph(Overlay-View) tab, Graph (Trend-View) tab or the Record list tab withoutpressing the [Cancel] button. Then, the analyzed data storage dialog will bedisplayed. “The reanalyzed data is not saved. Update?” appears. Note that thereanalyzed data is not saved and the display goes to each tab screen if you pressthe [NO] button here.If you press the [YES] button here, the reanalyzed data wil be saved and thedisplay goes to each tab screen.

Moving the vertex to the right

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2.6 Selection particle save

After analysis is performed in the particle image list window, the results about the particles of the

marked particle image can be stored.

Press the [Save] button on the analysis result screen.

Figure 5-37: [Data storage] dialog

When you select the [Selection particle Save] from this dialog, the selection particle list box isenabled and you can select among All selection particles, Marked particles and No marked particles

to store.

When you select an item and press the [Save] button, the particles to be stored will be reanalyzed

and its results will be stored in the new record.

2.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen

The display colors on the Analysis results screen can be changed. For details, refer to Chapter 11,

1.2 View settings – Result (Graph).

Item Function

All selection particles All particles in the area can be stored.

Marked particles The selected particles with mark selected in the particle image list can bestored.

No marked particles The selected particles other than the ones with mark selected in the particleimage list can be stored.

Table 5-12: [Data storage] dialog items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





3. Particle image list

3.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Particle Image List] screen.

The [Particle Image List] screen can display the particle images for the test data selected fromthe [Records List] screen.


Figure 5-38: [Particle Image List] screen

Item Functions

Sort This function sorts and displays image data.

Particle Size The displayed size of the images can be altered. Images can be listed at fullsize, 2×, 4×, 8× and 10×.

Display Param: Do not display: Particle images are displayed without parameters. Limitingparameters: The limit axis parameters are displayed under each particle image.

Table 5-13: [Particle Image List] screen items





Figure 5-39: Parameter display screen


Right click the image list display to copy images to the clipboard.

Figure 5-40: Popup menu in the [Particle Image List] screen

Mark limitation When you select an item among No limitation (images are displayedregardless of the marks), Mark display (only the marked images are displayed)and Display outside mark (images without marks are displayed), you candisplay the selected type screen.When a particle image is clicked on, the border of the image turns red

(marked). Click again reverts to the previous color. The marked particle isdisplayed marked in the Multi Scattergram screen display of the [AnalysisResults] screen.The information about Marking is saved in the Record.

Boundaryline The particle image data can be displayed as outlines


Item Functions

Copy To Clipboard(1 Particle)

Copy particle images for single particles to the clipboard.

Copy To Clipboard (1 page) Copy all displayed particle images to the clipboard.

Detail Information Display detailed information on the corresponding particles on thescreen.

Table 5-14: [Particle Image List] screen pop-up menu items

Item Functions

Table 5-13: [Particle Image List] screen items

Displays parameters of each axis





3.4 Detailed information display

Detailed particle data can be displayed.

1 Right click on one particle in the Particle Image List screen, then select [Detail Information]

from the context menu.


Figure 5-41: [Particle Image Clip] dialog

Item Functions

Detailed data list The detailed data for the selected particle are displayed.

Particle image Displays the particle image.

[Image] radio button Select to save and copy data in bitmap form.

[List] radio button Select to save and copy data in CSV form.

[Save] button Save with the above settings.

[Copy] button Copy to the clipboard with the above settings.

[Close] button Close the dialog.

Table 5-15: [Particle Image Clip] dialog items





4. Frequency tables

4.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Frequency Table] screen.

The [Frequency Table] screen can be used to display frequency tables for the records selectedon the [Record List] screen. The frequency table list on the X-axis limited range, the frequency

table list on the Y-axis limited range, and the scatter frequency table with limits are displayed.


Figure 5-42: [Frequency Table] screen


The displayed frequency table data can be copied to the clipboard.

1 Right click on a frequency table, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the context

menu. The data is copied to the clipboard.






5. Multi Scattergrams

5.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Multi Scattergrams] screen.

The [Multi Scattergrams] screen can display the scattergrams for up to eight records selected onthe Record List screen.

This is a useful application for looking at the change in time of the scattergram for the same

particles.


Figure 5-43: [Multi Scattergrams] screen

5.3 Copying to clip board

You can copy the data to clip board.

1 Right click on the Multi Scattergram screen and select “Copy to clip board” in the displayed menu.

The Multi Scattergram will be copied to the clip board.

CAUTION

This cannot be executed during reanalysis.





5.4 View settings

Right click on the Multi Scattergram screen. Select “View Settings(Result Graph)” from thedisplayed menu. You can do view settings in the Multi Scattergram screen. For details, refer to

Chapter 11, DISPLAY SETUP .

5.5 Image

Click an optional scatter in the Multi Scattergram screen and right click to display the menu. Select

“Image” from the displayed menu.

The corresponding scatter records are displayed as thumbnails.

Furthermore, if you double click an optional scatter, the image thumbnails will be displayed as

above.

5.6 Image (Reference)

Click an optional scatter in the Multi Scattergram screen and right click to display the menu. Select

“Image (Reference)” from the displayed menu.

The corresponding scatter records are displayed as thumbnails.

6. Graph (Overlay-View)

6.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen.

The [Graph (Overlay-View)] screen can display the particle diameter parameters and particle

form parameters for up to ten records selected on the [Record List] screen.

This displays an overlay graph of the frequency distribution with the X-axis limited, the cumulative

distribution, and the frequency distribution with the Y-axis limited. This is effective for looking at

particle differences.

NOTE: Clip board is an area on the main memory (inside the PC) where data is temporarilystored.

CAUTIONFor the image thumbnails of the Multi Scattergram, one image window and oneimage (reference) window, or total 2 windows can be displayed. You cannotdisplay one scatter as the image and image (reference).

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-






Figure 5-44: [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen


The frequency distribution graphs on the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen can be copied to the

clipboard.1 Right click on a record in the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen, then select [Copy To The

Clipboard] from the context menu. The frequency distribution graph is copied to the clipboard.

6.4 Setting up display

Right click on the screen and select Graph (Overlay-View) from the displayed menu. You can set

the indications of the graph (overlay-view) screen. For details, refer to Chapter 11, DISPLAY

SETUP .


CAUTIONThis cannot be executed during reanalysis.This cannot be executed if the X-axis and Y-axis limit parameters differ among theselected records.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





7. Meta Data

7.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Meta Data] screen.

The [Meta Data] screen can display sample information, test conditions and analysis conditionsfor the records selected on the [Record List] screen.


Figure 5-45: [Meta Data] screen


The data items on the [Meta Data] screen can be copied to the clipboard.

1 Right click on the [Meta Data] screen, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the

context menu.

The data is copied to the clipboard.






8. Detail Results

8.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Detail Results] screen.

On the [Detail Results] screen, the analysis results, the sample information, the particle diameterparameters analyzed statistically, and the particle form parameters analyzed statically for the

records selected on the [Record List] screen can be displayed.

The parameters selected as a limit axes display statistical analysis items restricted, and the others

display the items not restricted.


Figure 5-46: [Detail Results] screen


The data items on the [Detail Results] screen can be copied to the clipboard.

1 Right click on the [Detail Results] screen, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the

context menu.

The data is copied to the clipboard.






9. Graph (Trend-View)

9.1 Introduction

This section explains the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen.

The [Graph(Trend-View)] screen can display average values, mode values, 50% value, lowervalue, upper value, standard deviation, and coefficient of variation can be displayed. This is

effective for looking at the change in each record with the parameters.

For the meanings of parameters, refer to Chapter 16, 5.4 Statistical analysis items.


Figure 5-47: [Graph(Trend-View)] screen

1 Select the records to display by dragging on the [Record List] screen.

2 Press the [Graph (Trend-View)] tab on the [Record List] screen.

Data (average, mode, 50% value, lower value, upper value, SD (standard deviation), and CV

(coefficient of variation) on the limit particle parameters are displayed for the specified records.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-






The data items on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen can be copied to the clipboard.

1 Right click on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen, then select [Copy ToThe Clipboard] from

the context menu. The data is copied to the clipboard.

9.4 Setting up display

Right click on the screen and select Graph (Trend-View) from the displayed menu. You can set the

indications of the graph (trend-view) screen. For details, refer to Chapter 11, DISPLAY SETUP .

10. The File menu

10.1 File menu items

This section explains the [File] menu.

Available menu items when the [File] menu is selected are listed below.

Figure 5-48: [File] menu


CAUTIONThis cannot be executed during reanalysis.This cannot be executed if the X-axis and Y-axis limit parameters differ among theselected records.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





10.2 New

A new database can be created.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [New].The following dialog screen will be displayed.

Figure 5-49: [Browse For Folder ] dialog

2 Move to the directory in the folder displayed area where you want to create a new database and

press the [Make New Folder ] button. A folder named [New Folder ] will be created. Right

click on the new folder in the folder displayed area and select [Name change] from the

displayed menu. The folder name changing menu will be displayed. Then, change the name of

the [New Folder ] and press the [OK] button. You can create the new database. When you press

the [Cancel] button, the process will be canceled.

Figure 5-50: Warning dialog when there are files in the folder

NOTE: Database: An area for the centralized management of data.

CAUTION• When creating a database, if there is already a database in that folder, the

screen below is displayed and the database is not created.• Only one database can be stored in each folder.





10.3 Open

Open an existing database.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [Open].

The following dialog screen will be displayed.

Figure 5-51: [Open] dialog

2 Set the above items and click on the [Open] button.

An existing database opens.

If the selected database does not exist, the following dialog appears. Check the database save

directory and database name.

Figure 5-52: Open Confirmation dialog

Item Functions

Look in Select the directory where the database is stored.

File name Enter the database name.

Files of type Check that file type is set to record book file (*.rbk).

Table 5-16: [Open] dialog items





10.4 Import

The other database information can be imported in the current opening database.

1 Select [Menu] - [Import]. The following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 5-53: [Open]dialog

2 Select the database you want to import and press the [Open] button. Then, the data importing

dialog will be displayed.





Figure 5-54: [Import Data]dialog

3 Select the record you want to import and press the [ Import] button. then the measured data

stored in the FPIA-3000 can be imported.

Item Function

Reset Display Reset the sort filter result display or the search setting and return the display tothe default.

Search Search the record including the data you want to search in the selectedrecords.For the searching procedure, refer to 1.6 Search functions.

Select All Select all records in the selected database.

Sort The record information can be rearranged according to the sort items anddisplayed.For the operation procedure, refer to 1.4 Sort functions.

Filter The record which is applicable for the key item can be extracted by setting thekey item.For the operation procedure, refer to 1.5 The filter function.

Import Import the extracted record information to the FPIA-3000.

Table 5-17: [Open] dialog items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





10.5 Save

Test data can be made into a new database.

All data can be saved, or only the selected data.

1) All Data

All data displayed on the [Record List] screen can be saved as a new database.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [Save] – [All data].




press the [Make New Folder ] button. A folder named [New Folder ] will be created. Right

click on the new folder in the folder displayed area and select [Name change] from thedisplayed menu. The folder name changing menu will be displayed. Then, change the name of



The dialog below appears if data of the same name exists in the same directory. Change the save

location or the file name.

The dialog below is also displayed if there are files in the directory in which you want to create the

database. Empty the directory.

Figure 5-56: Save Confirmation dialog





2) Selected data

Data selected on the [Record List] screen can be saved as a new database.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [Save] – [Selected Data].




press the [Move New Folder ] button. A folder named [New Folder ] will be created. Right

click on the new folder in the folder displayed area and select [Name change] from the

displayed menu. The folder name changing menu will be displayed. Then, change the name of



The dialog below appears if data of the same name exists in the same directory. Change the Savein or the File name.

Figure 5-58: Save Confirmation dialog





10.6 Printing

Prints the data.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [Print].

The following dialog screen will be displayed. After placing a check in the checkbox for the item

you want to print and selecting the print format from the list box, press the [Print] button. Thedata for the records selected from the record list are printed according to the print format. Press

the [Cancel] button to return.

Figure 5-59: [Print] dialog

Item Item Functions

Testing Results Record List Select to print the record list.

Analysis Results Select to print the analysis results.

Particle Image Select to print image data.

Graph (Trend-View) Select to print the graph (trend).

Multi Scattergrams Select to print the Multi Scattergrams.

Graph(Overlay-View) Select to print the Graph(Overlay-View).

Frequency Size Frequency Select to print the particle diameter frequency tables.

Shape Frequency Select to print the particle form frequency tables.

User definition Select to print a table defined by the user.

[Analysis]check button

Analysis result data selection Place a checkmark in the check box to print out thecorresponding analysis result in printing.

[FormatSettings] button

The format to be used for printing can be set.

Table 5-18: [Print] dialog items





10.7 PDF Print

1 Select [Menu] - [File] - [PDF Print].

Figure 5-60: [PDF Print] dialog

The dialog shown in Figure 5-60 appears. Place check-marks at the appropriate items to be printed

and select a print format from the list box, and click the [PDF] button to output the selected records

in the [Record List] screen to the PDF file. Click the [Cancel] button to restore.

NOTE: Click on the [Format Settings] button to set the desired print format. For details, refer toChapter 12, PRINT FORMAT .

CAUTION1. By default, one page of analysis results is printed. The beginning section of the

image display is printed at the bottom of the analysis results print sheet. Toprint the rest of the image, set the number of pages in the format settings. Fordetails, see Chapter 12, PRINT FORMAT .

2. By default, one page of image data is printed. To print the rest of the image, setthe number of pages in the format settings. For details, refer to Chapter 12,PRINT FORMAT .

CAUTIONWhen printing is executed from the FPIA-3000 application, if an equipment erroror the like occurs in the printing, an error message is displayed from the printermanufacturer’s driver installed in Windows. Check the printer manufacturer'suser’s manual and eliminate the error.

(a)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Enter the file name at the place (a) in the PDF Print dialog. It is also possible to select a file in the

edit box and change the file name.

NOTE: The PDF(which is abbreviated to Portable Document Format) which is developed byAdobe Systems is a electronic document to be used to exchange the electronicdocument through the Internet.

Item Item FunctionsTesting Results Record List Select to output the record list to the PDF file.

Analysis Results Select to output the analysis results to the PDF file.

Particle Image Select to output the image data to the PDF file. (Note 1)

Graph (Trend-View) Select to output the Graph (Trend-View) to the PDFfile. (Note 2)

Multi Scattergrams Select to output the Multi Scattergrams to the PDF file.

Graph (Overlay-View)

Select to output the Graph (Overlay-View) to the PDFfile.

Frequency Size Frequency Select to output the particle diameter frequency table to

the PDF file.

Shape Frequency Select to output the particle form frequency table to thePDF file.

User defined Select to output to the PDF file in a format defined byuser.

[Analysis] checkbutton

Analysis result dataselection

Place a checkmark in the check box to print out thecorresponding analysis result in printing as PDF data.

[Format Settings]button

The format to be used for printing can be set.

[Change] button Changing the outputpath

Click the [Change] button to display the Windows File/Folder dialog. Select a desired folder in which file issaved.

Table 5-19: [PDF Print] dialog items

CAUTION• In the default setting, one sheet of the analysis results is output to the PDF file.

In the lower part of the analysis results PDF file, the first part of the imagedisplay will be output to the PDF file. To output the rest of the image to the PDFfile, set the number of prints in the format settings. For details, see Chapter 12,PRINT FORMAT .

• In the default setting, one sheet of the image data is output to the PDF file. To

output the rest of the image to the PDF file, set the number of prints in theformat settings. For details, see Chapter 12, PRINT FORMAT .

CAUTION• When the FPIA-3000 is set to Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, images cannot be

printed even if you try to print the analysis data and particle image data.• For details of Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION , and for the details of the Merge(LPF+HPF) setting, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





10.8 CSV export

Data can be exported in CSV file format.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [CSV].


Figure 5-61: [Export CSV] dialog

NOTE: • CSV format: A file format in which data items are separated by commas “,”. CSV filescan be read by compatible applications (The standard WordPad provided withWindows, MS Office Excel and others).

• Export: The output of data converted for compatibility so that it can be used by otherapplications.

Contents of Output Functions

Record List Check here to export the list of records, then enter the export file name.

Size Frequency Check here to export the particle diameter and frequency, then enter theexport file name. The “Sample Name”, “Sample Number”, and “RecordNumber” are added to the file name.

Shape Frequency Check here to export the particle form frequency table, then enter theexport file name. The “Sample name”, “Sample Number”, and “RecordNumber” are added to the file name.

Scattergram Check here to export the scattergram data, then enter the export filename. The “Sample name”, “Sample No.”, and “Record No.” are addedto the file name.

Output Path The destination directory for the CSV file export can be specified. Followstandard Windows operating procedure to set the path.

Analysis If you press the check bottun, you can output default analysis result andresults of the enhancing 1 to 5 as CSV format.

Table 5-20: [Export CSV] dialog items





10.9 Transmission to the host

Export all data from the record list, or all selected data, to the host.

1 Select [Menu] – [File] – [Data Transmission].


Figure 5-62: [Host Transmission] dialog

For the contents of the information sent, refer to Appendix D, 4. Data format .

Change Set the destination directory for the CSV file export.

Export CSV Export data in CSV file format.

Cancel Close the screen.

Item Functions

Output Select RS-232C or LAN.

Transmit Execute transmission.

Cancel Close the dialog.

Table 5-21: [Host Transmission] dialog items

CAUTIONIf the host is not connected to the data processing section of the FPIA-3000 or thetransmission conditions are not appropriate, if data is transmitted to the host,“Transmission error” is displayed in the [Host Transmission] dialog. Either checkthe transmission condition settings in Chapter 9, SYSTEM SETUP or check thatthe connection cable is connected correctly.

Contents of Output Functions

Table 5-20: [Export CSV] dialog items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




Chapter 6 QUALITY CONTROL

1. Quality control ............................................................................................. 6-11.1 Overview of quality control ....................................................................6-1

1.2 File Settings .......................................................................................... 6-21.3 Adding a quality control file ................................................................... 6-31.4 Deleting a quality control file .................................................................6-51.5 Target setting ........................................................................................ 6-61.6 Auto target............................................................................................. 6-61.7 Deleting a quality control data............................................................... 6-7

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



QUALITY CONTROL


1. Quality control

1.1 Overview of quality control

The state of the instrument can be monitored by regularly measuring parameters, such as the

average diameter of latex particles, and observing time series data.The screen below is displayed via [Maintenance] – [Quality Control]. The target parameter can

be managed as a time series and displayed.

Figure 6-1: [QC Chart] screen

Item Explanation

File Settings Create a new QC data file or remove a QC data file.

Delete Delete QC data.

CSV Save the displayed QC data as CSV data in the file.When the [CSV] button is pressed, QC Save As dialog will be displayed. Inputthe file name and store the CSV file. (The extension should be .csv.)

Print Print the displayed QC data.When the [Print] button is pressed, Windows-based standard print dialog willopen. Perform printer settings if necessary, and print the data.

Close Close the QC chart screen.

Table 6-1: [QC Chart] screen



QUALITY CONTROL


1.2 File Settings

Create a new QC data file or remove a QC data file.

1 Press the [File Settings] button in the QC chart dialog.


Figure 6-2: [File Settings] dialog

Item Explanation

NewFile Create a new QC data file.

Delete Remove the selected QC data file.

Target Limit Settings Edit control limit value information on the selected quality control data.

Auto Target Set control limit value information on the selected quality control data,

according to the SD.

Table 6-2: Edit QC Data items



QUALITY CONTROL


1.3 Adding a quality control file

Add new quality control files from the [QC Chart] screen.

1 Register an SOP for particles subject to quality control, then run tests at regular intervals (such

as once every morning). (For details on the SOP registration method, refer to Chapter 8, SOP

SETTINGS .)2 Run [Maintenance] – [Quality Control] and click on the [New file] button to open the [File

Settings] dialog, and then click on the [New file] button.


Figure 6-3: [Add Quality Control File] dialog

Item Explanation

SampleInformation

SOP name Select the SOP name you want to display on the QC chartscreen. (For SOP, refer to CHAPTER 8: SOP SETTINGS".)

Parameter Select the measurement parameter you want to control qualityfrom one of [Analyzed], [Particles], [Limit X axis] and [Limit Y axis]categories. (The actual display names for "Limit X axis" and "LimitY axis" are the limit axes names set with the SOP.

Item Select the measurement parameter you want to control quality.The parameters selected under [Parameters] are displayed in thelist.

QC LimitSettings

Test data When "Read Data from DB" is selected, the past data meeting theSOP name, parameters and items selected in setting the controlsamples is handled as an effective data and create a QC datafile.If you select Stop by Time mode and repeat mesure count isset more than 2, only first data will be imported as control data.When "Do not read Data from DB" is selected, a QC data fileconsisting of SOP name, parameters and items selected insetting the new control samples. In this step, the QC limit settingsselected manually can only be effective.

Table 6-3: [Add Quality Control file] Dialog Items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



QUALITY CONTROL


3 Enter quality control file information for the dialog items.

The [QC Chart] screen is displayed as shown below.

SampleInformation

LimitSettings

Automaticsetting

The record data which have been measured is extracted as theQC data and QC chart screen will be displayed using the QC limitsettings set with 1 ~ 3SD.Select upper limit:When you want to control quality using the mean value and the

QC limit settings due to SD after reading the measured data,select the upper limit in the QC area.1SD ~3SD are provided.Select lower limit:When you want to control quality using the mean value and theQC limit settings due to SD after reading the measured data,select the lower limit in the QC area.1SD ~3SD are provided.

QC LimitSettings

Manualsetting

Create a QC file based on the settings of the target, upper limitand lower limit.Target:Input the target in display of the measurement parameter youwant to control quality.

Upper limit:Input the upper limit in display of the measurement parameter youwant to control quality.Lower limit:Input the lower limit in display of the measurement parameter youwant to control quality.

Registration The QC file is created.

Cancel Cancel the processing and close the [Add Quality Control file] dialog.

Item Explanation

Table 6-3: [Add Quality Control file] Dialog Items

(D)

(C)

(A)

(B)

Error status display



QUALITY CONTROL


Figure 6-4: Explanation of the quality control charts

When the items set for the five parameters(OLensUnit,Light field system,SOP name,paramater and

items) are selected, the following are displayed.

• (A) Quality control graphs.

• (B) Quality control data target values, upper and lower limit values, average, SD, data average,

number of QC error data.• (C) QC data list.

Under (A), the average value is displayed as a green line, the upper and lower limit values as redlines, and the data points as a black line.

Under (B), data exceeding the QC limits are displayed in red spaces within (C), and the number of

QC error data is indicated under the [QC Error ] field of (B).

1.4 Deleting a quality control file

Delete the currently registered quality control data.

1 On the [QC Chart] dialog, select the SOP name, parameters and items for the quality control

chart.

2 Display the quality control data to delete.

3 Press the [DeleteFile] button on the [File Settings] dialog.


Figure 6-5: [Delete QC files] dialog


The selected quality control data is deleted.

CAUTIONIf you register a quality control file, information will be imported in the qualitycontrol file automatically when you measure a sample using pertinent SOP fromthen on.If quality control range is invalid, a quality control invalid dialog will be shown.Check whether the qualify control sample and the measurement of the FPIA-3000are normal.This dialog box will be closed when [OK] button is pressed.



QUALITY CONTROL


1.5 Target setting

The dialog box below appears when the [Target Limit Setting] button is clicked on the [File

Settings] dialog.

Figure 6-6: QC Target Settings

1 Enter the target value, upper limit value and lower limit value.


The value is reflected.

1.6 Auto target

Click the [Auto Target] button on the [File Settings] dialog to display the figure below.

Figure 6-7: [Setting Target Limit] dialog

1 Select the upper and lower limit values for the target value from 1–3 DS.


The target value is updated.



QUALITY CONTROL


1.7 Deleting a quality control data

The dialog box below appears when the [Delete] button is clicked.

Figure 6-8: [Delete QC Data] dialog

1 Select the quality control data numbers to delete by specifying the first and last numbers in the

range to be deleted.

Figures can be entered directly.

2 Press the [OK] button.The specified data is deleted.



QUALITY CONTROL


Blank page.




Chapter 7 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7-11.1 Resetting the alarm ............................................................................... 7-1

1.2 Reverting from an error ......................................................................... 7-21.3 Display of error history .......................................................................... 7-3

2. Error message list ....................................................................................... 7-42.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)................................................... 7-42.2 Error code list ........................................................................................ 7-62.3 Error message list by function............................................................... 7-7

3. Error messages and troubleshooting .......................................................... 7-9



TROUBLESHOOTING


1. Error messages

1.1 Resetting the alarm

When an error occurs with the device, an alarm sounds and a message appears on the screen.

Click the [Stop Alarm] button on the [Maintenance] – [Error History] screen to stop thealarm.

Figure 7-1: Stop Alarm



TROUBLESHOOTING


1.2 Reverting from an error

When an error occurs, recover from it with reference to the action messages displayed.

1 When an error occurs, a message appears accompanied by an alarm.

Error messages can also be displayed by selecting [Maintenance] – [Error History].

2 Confirm the error message, and click on the [Recover ] button.The FPIA-3000 reverts from the error automatically.

When the device does not revert from the error even after pressing the button, refer to Chapter 7,

7-9 Error messages and troubleshooting .

Figure 7-2: Recover



TROUBLESHOOTING


1.3 Display of error history

Past errors can be displayed as a list.

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Error History].

The Error History screen is then displayed. The error history contains the fifty most recent error

records. When the number of error records exceeds fifty, records are erased starting with theoldest first.

Figure 7-3: [Error History] screen

When you click the [CSV] button, the [Save As] dialog is displayed. Here, when you specify the

folder and input the file name, the error history information recorded in the database is created in

CSV format in the folder with the specified file name.

Item Explanation

Recover Check marks are displayed next to errors from which the system has alreadyreverted.

Date Displays the date and time of the error.

User name The name of the user who was logged on at the time of the error is displayed.

Error code Displays the number specific to the error.

Errors Displays the content of the error that has occurred.

Table 7-1: [Error History] dialog items



TROUBLESHOOTING


2. Error message list

2.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)

[0]

-0.053MPa pressure Error. ............................................................................................... 7-110.22MPa pressure Error.................................................................................................... 7-11

[C]Cleaning Pressure Error.................................................................................................... 7-11

[D]Data file cannot open........................................................................................................ 7-14

Detection time-out............................................................................................................ 7-12

[F]Filter Change Error............................................................................................................. 7-9

[G]Gas sensor of detector part is out of service..................................................................... 7-14

[I]Image analysis time-out.................................................................................................... 7-12

IP board is not connect. .................................................................................................... 7-13

[M]Magnification Change Error............................................................................................... 7-9

[R]

Replace sheath liquid........................................................................................................ 7-10[S]

Sample Syringe Error. ........................................................................................................ 7-9

Sheath Syringe Error. ......................................................................................................... 7-9

Solvent is Leaked from detector....................................................................................... 7-14

Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit..................................................................................... 7-14

[T]The automatic focusing Error........................................................................................... 7-10

The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. ............................................................................. 7-13

The communications to IP board had error. ..................................................................... 7-13

The communications to the temperature control board had error. ................................... 7-13The fan (fluid unit) is out of service. ................................................................................ 7-13

The fan (rear side) is out of service. ................................................................................. 7-13

The fan (stir unit) is out of service. .................................................................................. 7-13

The flash brightness cannot adjust. .................................................................................. 7-10

The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust............................................................................ 7-10

The flash brightness is abnormal...................................................................................... 7-10



TROUBLESHOOTING


The flash has abnormal brightness....................................................................................7-10

The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service. ..................................................................7-14

The pressure decrease abnormality ...................................................................................7-11

The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust...................................................................7-11

The sampling cover Error. ................................................................................................7-12

Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error) ..................................7-14Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)....................................................7-14

Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error) .................................................7-14

The testing unit is not connected.......................................................................................7-14

The stir motor cannot adjust..............................................................................................7-10

The stir motor had abnormal rotation. ................................................................................7-9

The temperature control board is not connect...................................................................7-13

The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range.........................................................7-12

The temperature of the testing unit is out of range. ..........................................................7-12

The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range. ...........................................................7-12

The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected.................................................7-13

The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. ........................................7-13The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected............................................7-13

The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected.............................................7-13



TROUBLESHOOTING


2.2 Error code list

113010 Cleaning Pressure Error...................................................................................... 7-11

113022 0.22MPa pressure Error...................................................................................... 7-11

114005 -0.053MPa pressure Error. ................................................................................. 7-11

119010 The pressure decrease abnormality .................................................................... 7-11

121030 The temperature of the testing unit is out of range............................................. 7-12

123019 The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range.......................................... 7-12

125520 The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range.............................................. 7-12

127410 The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. ......................... 7-13

127411 The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected. ............................. 7-13

127900 The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected. ............................ 7-13

127910 The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected. ................................. 7-13

132910 Replace sheath liquid.......................................................................................... 7-10

141000 The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust. ................................................... 7-11

212000 Sheath Syringe Error. ........................................................................................... 7-9

214010 Sample Syringe Error. .......................................................................................... 7-9242100 The stir motor had abnormal rotation................................................................... 7-9

242101 The stir motor cannot adjust. .............................................................................. 7-10

351010 Magnification Change Error................................................................................. 7-9

351030 Filter Change Error............................................................................................... 7-9

351040 The flash brightness cannot adjust. .................................................................... 7-10

351040 The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust.............................................................. 7-10

351050 The flash has abnormal brightness. .................................................................... 7-10

351051 The flash brightness is abnormal........................................................................ 7-10

351110 Detection time-out.............................................................................................. 7-12

351120 Image analysis time-out...................................................................................... 7-12

421520 The sampling cover Error................................................................................... 7-12429100 Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit....................................................................... 7-14

429101 Solvent is Leaked from detector......................................................................... 7-14

429110 The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service. .................................................... 7-14

429111 Gas sensor of detector part is out of service....................................................... 7-14

429120 The fan (rear side) is out of service.................................................................... 7-13

429121 The fan (fluid unit) is out of service................................................................... 7-13

429122 The fan (stir unit) is out of service. .................................................................... 7-13

431020 The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. ............................................................... 7-13

432042 Data file cannot open.......................................................................................... 7-14

441092 Testing unit communication error. (response time-out) ..................................... 7-14441093 Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error).................... 7-14

451064 The communications to the temperature control board had error. ..................... 7-13

451065 The temperature control board is not connect. ................................................... 7-13

451081 IP board is not connect. ...................................................................................... 7-13

451082 The communications to IP board had error. ....................................................... 7-13

466110 The automatic focusing Error............................................................................. 7-10

486020 The testing unit is not connected........................................................................ 7-14

486021 Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)................................... 7-14



TROUBLESHOOTING


2.3 Error message list by function

[Motor-related]The sampling cover Error. ...............................................................................................7-12

The stir motor had abnormal rotation. ...............................................................................7-9

The stir motor cannot adjust. ............................................................................................7-10Sheath Syringe Error. .........................................................................................................7-9

The automatic focusing Error. .........................................................................................7-10

Magnification Change Error. .............................................................................................7-9

The fan (stir unit) is out of service. ..................................................................................7-13

The fan (rear side) is out of service. .................................................................................7-13

The fan (fluid unit) is out of service. ...............................................................................7-13

Filter Change Error. ...........................................................................................................7-9

[Aspiration-Related]Sample Syringe Error. ........................................................................................................7-9

[Chamber-related]Replace sheath liquid. ......................................................................................................7-10

The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust. .................................................................7-11

[Pressure-related]0.22 MPa pressure Error ...................................................................................................7-11

-0.053 MPa pressure Error ................................................................................................7-11

The pressure decrease abnormality ..................................................................................7-11

[Temperature-related]The communications to the temperature control board had error. ....................................7-13

The temperature control board is not connect. .................................................................7-13

The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected. ...............................................7-13

The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range. .......................................................7-12

The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. .......................................7-13

The temperature of the testing unit is out of range. .........................................................7-12

The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected. ..........................................7-13

The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range. ..........................................................7-12

The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected. ...........................................7-13

[Processor-Related]The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. .............................................................................7-13

The communications to IP board had error. .....................................................................7-13

IP board is not connect. ....................................................................................................7-13

Image analysis time-out ....................................................................................................7-12

Detection time-out.............................................................................................................7-12

Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)....................................................7-14

Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error) ..................................7-14



TROUBLESHOOTING


[Host-Related]Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)................................................. 7-14

The testing unit is not connected. ..................................................................................... 7-14

Data file cannot open........................................................................................................ 7-14

[Gas sensor related]Solvent is Leaked from detector....................................................................................... 7-14Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit..................................................................................... 7-14

Gas sensor of detector part is out of service..................................................................... 7-14

The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service................................................................... 7-14

[Other]The flash has abnormal brightness. ................................................................................. 7-10

The flash brightness cannot adjust. ................................................................................. 7-10

The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust. .......................................................................... 7-10

The flash brightness is abnormal. .................................................................................... 7-10



TROUBLESHOOTING


3. Error messages and troubleshooting

This section explains error messages and the relevant countermeasures to be taken.

When an error occurs, take the appropriate action referring to the information provided in this

section. If you still cannot revert from the error after taking all measures that are suggested, contact

your Sysmex service representative for an inspection.

Error code 212000

Error message Sheath Syringe Error.

Cause 1) The sheath syringe malfunctioned.

Solution 1) Revert from the error.

Error code 214010

Error message Sample Syringe Error.

Cause 1) The sample aspiration syringe malfunctioned.


Error code 351010

Error message Magnification Change Error.

Cause 1) The mechanism for switching between the high power test mode and the low power test modeinside the optical detector malfunctioned.


Error code 351030

Error message Filter Change Error.

Cause 1) When the optical sensor switched magnification, the ND filter for light adjustment did not switchnormally.


Error code 242100

Error message The stir motor had abnormal rotation.

Cause 1) The rpm of the mixing motor exceeded the set range during testing.

Solution 1) Revert from the error, then check the mixing motor rpm.(See Chapter 15, 2.9 Stir motoradjustment .)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TROUBLESHOOTING


Error code 242101

Error message The stir motor cannot adjust.

Cause 1) The motor rpm was not automatically adjusted normally during the mixing motor rpmadjustment sequence.


Error code 351051

Error message The flash brightness is abnormal.

Cause 1) The stroboscope did not flash normally.


Error code 351050

Error message The flash has abnormal brightness.

Cause 1) Stroboscope brightness value was outside the normal range during flash.Solution 1) Revert from the error.

Error code 351040

Error message 1) The flash brightness cannot adjust.2) The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust.

Cause 1) The stroboscope brightness was not automatically adjusted normally during the stroboscopebrightness adjustment sequence.

2) The stroboscope brightness was not adjusted normally during the stroboscope brightnessadjustment sequence in the optional dark field mode.

Solution 1) 2) Revert from the error.

Error code 466110

Error message The automatic focusing Error.

Cause 1) The auto focusing sequence did not function properly.

Solution 1) Use the manual focus function to focus roughly, then try auto focusing again. (Refer toChapter 15, 2.3 Manual focusing )

Error code 132910

Error message Replace sheath liquid.

Cause 1) The sheath liquid has run out.2) The tube for aspirating the sheath liquid is bent.

Solution 1) Replace the sheath liquid container with a new one, then revert from the error.2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TROUBLESHOOTING


Error code 141000

Error message The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust.

Cause 1) The tube for discarding waste fluid is bent.

Solution 1) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.

Error code 113022

Error message 0.22MPa pressure Error.

Cause 1) No pressure supplied from the pneumatic unit.2) The tube for supplying pressure from the pneumatic unit is bent.

Solution 1) Adjust the pressure from the pneumatic unit, and revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit .)

2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.

Error code 113010

Error message Cleaning Pressure Error.

Cause 1) No pressure supplied from the pneumatic unit.2) The tube for supplying pressure from the pneumatic unit is bent.3) Adjustment of the pressure inside the testing unit was wrong.


2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.3) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,

2.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure.)

Error code 119010

Error message The pressure decrease abnormality

Cause 1) No pressure supplied from the pneumatic unit.2) The tube for supplying pressure from the pneumatic unit is bent.3) Adjustment of the pressure inside the testing unit was wrong.


2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.3) See if the testing-unit pressure matches that for the current sheath liquid. If not, adjust it, then

revert from the error.

Error code 114005

Error message -0.053MPa pressure Error.

Cause 1) No vacuum supplied from the vacuum unit.2) The tube for supplying vaccum from the vacuum unit is bent.3) Adjustment of the pressure inside the testing unit was wrong.

Solution 1) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.)

2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.3) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,

2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.)

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



TROUBLESHOOTING


Error code 121030

Error message The temperature of the testing unit is out of range.

Cause 1) Ambient temperature has left the 15-30°C range.

Solution 1) Adjust the ambient temperature to 15-30°C.

Error code 123019

Error message The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range.

Cause 1) Sheath liquid temperature has deviated from the set value.

Solution 1) The error is cancelled automatically when the sheath liquid temperature enters the set range.If the error persists, contact your Sysmex service representative for an inspection.

Error code 125520

Error message The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range.

Cause 1) Temperature near the radiator f ins has deviated from the set value.Solution 1) Turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for an

inspection.

Error code 351110

Error message Detection time-out

Cause 1) A communication error occurred between the testing unit and the data processing unit.

Solution 1) Check that the USB cable is connected, then revert from the error.

Error code 351120

Error message Image analysis time-out

Cause 1) Image analysis processing did not complete within the regulation time.


Error code 421520

Error message The sampling cover Error.

Cause 1) The opening/closing action of the sample mixing chamber cover did not function properly.




TROUBLESHOOTING


Error code 429120, 429121, 429122

Error message The fan (rear side) is out of service.

The fan (fluid unit) is out of service.

The fan (stir unit) is out of service.

Cause 1) The fan installed in the instrument is not working normally.

Solution 1) Turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for aninspection.

Error code 127900, 127410, 127411, 127910

Error message The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected.

The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected.

The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected.

The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected.

Cause 1) A wire for the temperature thermister has broken.

Solution 1) Turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for aninspection.

Error code 431020

Error message The checksum of EEPROM is wrong.

Cause 1) There was an error in reading from the Main Unit EEPROM.

Solution 1) Restart the entire device.

Error code 451081, 451082Error message IP board is not connect.

The communications to IP board had error.

Cause 1) There was a communications error between the IP board in the Main Unit and the dataprocessing unit.


Error code 451064, 451065

Error message The communications to the temperature control board had error.

The temperature control board is not connect.

Cause 1) There was a communications error between the temperature controller in the Main Unit and theMain Unit control section.




TROUBLESHOOTING


Error code 441092, 441093,486020, 486021

Error message Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)

Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error)

The testing unit is not connected.

Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)

Cause 1) There was an error in communications between the Main Unit and the data processing unit.

Solution 1) Check the wiring between the Main Unit and the data processing unit, then restart the entiredevice.

Error code 432042

Error message Data file cannot open.

Cause 1) There was an error in a file within the data processing unit.


Error code 429100, 429101

Error message Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit.

Solvent is Leaked from detector.

Cause 1) When alcohol is used as the sheath liquid, a gas sensor installed in the fluid unit detection unitdetected an alcohol leak.

Solution 1) Immediately turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative foran inspection.

Error code 429110, 429111

Error message The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service.

Gas sensor of detector part is out of service.

Cause 1) The gas sensor installed in the fluid unit detection unit broke down.

Solution 1) Immediately turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative foran inspection.



TROUBLESHOOTING


Blank page.




Chapter 8 SOP SETTINGS

1. SOP settings ...............................................................................................8-11.1 Explanation of SOP............................................................................... 8-1

1.2 Using SOPs...........................................................................................8-11.3 Registering SOPs.................................................................................. 8-11.4 Changing SOP's name.......................................................................... 8-21.5 Editing and deleting SOPs ....................................................................8-21.6 SOP Import / Export .............................................................................. 8-4



SOP SETTINGS


1. SOP settings

1.1 Explanation of SOP

SOP is the abbreviation for Standard Operation Procedure. The measurement conditions, analysis

conditions, hardware settings, and other setting information related to measurement are managedall together in the database in the analysis PC, making it easy to manage user measurement

conditions. FPIA-3000 has functions for registering, deleting, editing, and using SOPs.

• SOPs can be selected in the measurement and analysis condition dialogs and used for

measurement.

• On the analysis results screen, new SOPs can be registered and SOPs selected to use for data re-

analysis.

• You can do the followings with [Settings] – [SOP]; register, edit, delete, export and import

SOPs, and change the names of them.

1.2 Using SOPsAlready registered SOPs can be selected for use in measurement from the measurement and

analysis condition dialogs. For the concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 4, 3.2 SOP setting .

On the analysis results screen, existing SOPs can be selected to use for data re-analysis. For the

concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5 Reanalyze.

1.3 Registering SOPs

On the [SOP Setting] dialog, new SOPs can be registered, and new SOPs can be registered on the

analysis results screen. For the concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5 Reanalyze.

How to register the SOP using [Settings] - [SOP] is explained here.Use the Up and Down buttons to select the item from the SOP list you want to check in the SOP

settings dialog, and press the [Registration] button.

Figure 8-1: [new SOP registration] dialog

Input the SOP name in the SOP name input area and press the [OK] button.When a message which says “Save New SOP, Are you sure ?” is displayed, press the [OK] button.

The new entered SOP name is registered and displayed in the SOP list.

To edit the SOP, refer to 1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs.

New SOP Registration



SOP SETTINGS


1.4 Changing SOP's name

Select the SOP you want to change its name from the SOP list in the SOP Settings dialog. When

you press the [Name Change] button, the following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 8-2: [SOP name change] dialog

Change the SOP name indicated in the SOP name change area and press the [OK] button.

When a message which says "Replace SOP. Are you sure ?" appears, press the [OK] button.

The SOP name is changed.

You can confirm the changed SOP name from the SOP list in the SOP Settings dialog.

1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs

You can edit and delete SOPs with [Settings] – [SOP].

Figure 8-1 is displayed via [Settings] – [SOP].

It can be used to edit and delete SOPs.

(1) Editing SOPs

A list of the registered SOPs is displayed in the SOP settings window. Left click the name of theSOP you want to edit or check in the SOP list box. The detailed parameters of the selected SOP are

displayed in the right list box in the SOP settings window.

To edit SOP parameters, left click the appropriate value field in the SOP settings window. This

enables you to select an item for the information or to edit it.

After selecting an item for the stipulated information or editing it, press the [Update] button. The

SOP contents are changed. When the LensUnit changing combo box in the SOP settings window

is selected and the magnification of the lens unit is changed, the corresponding SOP is displayed in

the SOP list box. Light field system (Bright field/Dark field) can be switched only when the

standard magnification (10X) is selected.

CAUTIONFollowing SOP name cannot be changed.AUTOFOCUS, AUTOFOCUSMSR, CALIBHPF and CALIBLPF

NOTE: • For details of the Objective Lens, refer to the Appendix H, HIGH/LOW

MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION).• For details of the Light field system, refer to the Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK

FIELD UNIT MANUAL.

SOP name change area



SOP SETTINGS


(2) Deleting SOPs

Registered SOPs can be deleted. Select the SOP you want to delete from the list of registered SOPs

in the SOP settings window, then left click that SOP name to select it.

Press the [Del. SOP] button. That SOP information is deleted.

Figure 8-3: [Setting SOP] screen

If you press the button, the display position of the SOP selected by the cursor moves up by one.

The display order can be changed in the SOP list that is used for measurement conditions etc. The

SOP list follows the testing and analysis parameter (SOP) list display order.

If you press the button, the display position of the SOP selected by the cursor moves down by

one.

Refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings for SOP settings.

When the SOP information is updated, the update date on the SOP setting dialog is changed to the

update date.

You can select the SOP for the O Lens Unit 5X, O Lens Unit 10X or O Lens Unit 20X from the O

lens unit list box. Each SOP list will be displayed in the SOP list.

CAUTIONFollowing SOP name cannot be changed.AUTOFOCUS, AUTOFOCUSMSR, CALIBHPF and CALIBLPF



SOP SETTINGS


1.6 SOP Import / Export

(1) Export SOP

You can export the selected SOP or the all registered SOP information in the file. (The file

name should be **.sop.)

Use the radio button at the lower of the Import button and select All Data or Selected Data.When the [Export] button is pressed, the following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 8-4: [Save As..] dialog

Select the folder you want to save or create a new folder here. Input the SOP save file name in thefile name input area and press the [Save] button. The SOP information will be exported.

File name input area



SOP SETTINGS


(2) Import SOP

Press [Import] button. followg Figure 8-5 SOP list dialog will be shown.

In this dialog, click SOP name, highlight the SOP names by dragging the mouse over it with

pressing left cursor or select [Select All] button. Press [Import] button if you select SOP.

Figure 8-5: [SOP list] dialog

Reread the imported SOP and additionally register it in the present SOP information.

If the registered SOP name and the SOP name to be exported are the same or if the update date

or content is different form the file information to be exported, "Same name already exists.

Please input another name." dialog will be displayed.

When you change the import SOP name here and press the [OK] button, the SOP will be

imported as another name.

The exported SOP name and the registered SOP name will be displayed in the SOP list.

NOTE: When the contents of the registered SOP and the SOP to be exported are the sameeven if the both names are the same and the update dates are different, SOP will not beimported.



SOP SETTINGS


Figure 8-6 explains the overall flow of the FPIA-3000 analysis using the SOP.

Figure 8-6: Relational chart for SOP settings

Analysis conditions setting screen (SOP settings when analyzing)

This screen can be used to set the SOP conditions by the following twomethods.1) Select the existing SOP conditions and carry out analysis2) Select the existing SOP conditions and revise them to carry out

analysisThe revised SOP settings will not be registered if you select 2).

When reanalyzing

(after analysis)

SOP selection and revision screenList boxes that include revisedconditions cannot be selected.

Reanalysis screen

When reanalyzing,1) Perform reanalysis using the existing SOP

2) Register a new SOP based on the existing SOPconditions to carry out reanalysis

Setting SOPs and reanalysis can be carried out with thetwo methods above.

Reanalysis conditions setting screen

Select the existing SOP and editparameters. When the parameters arechanged, the list cannot be selected.

SOP settings

The screen can be used to register, edit ordelete the existing SOPs.




Chapter 9 SYSTEM SETUP

1. System setup............................................................................................... 9-11.1 Setting menu items ............................................................................... 9-1

1.2 System settings..................................................................................... 9-1

2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S) ......................................... 9-52.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics.............................................9-52.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings................................................. 9-6

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



SYSTEM SETUP


Move the scroll bar in the [System Parameters] dialog up and down with the mouse to display

the item you want to change, then left click the value field for that item. You can now select an item

for this value or edit this value. Here, either select an item or edit the value.

After editing or selecting an item, press the [OK] button. The value is stored into the database.

When you press the [Export CSV] button, a device settings information file can be created in the

CSV format.When you press the [Export CSV] button, a dialog is displayed for selecting the folder in which

to store the CSV-format file and for inputting the file name, so specify the folder and input the file

name. The CSV-format file is created in the stipulated folder.

For details on the device related parameters, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS

for explanations of parameters.

The main system parameter settings are listed below.

Automatic printing

This is the [System] – [Print] – [Auto Print] field in the dialog.

Select [Apply] or [Not Apply]. If [Apply] is selected, results will be printed out automatically

after every test. Select [Not Apply] to prevent automatic printing.

Setting the pneumatic unit timer

This is the [Testing unit] – [Pneumatic Unit Timer ] field in the dialog. The timeout period can

be set.

[ON] or [OFF] can be selected in the [ON/OFF] column. Select [ON] to enable the pneumatic unit

timer.

The [Timeout Duration] is the length of time, in minutes, from the pneumatic unit entering ready

mode to it entering sleep mode. If [ON] and [Timeout period Timer ] are set, the pneumatic unit

will stop (enter sleep mode) once the set timeout period has elapsed from the start of ready mode

operation. Tests cannot be run in sleep mode.

To run a test, press the [Pneumatic Unit] button on the analytical conditions screen to restart the

pneumatic unit.

After the pneumatic unit restarts, it returns to ready mode and can run tests.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



SYSTEM SETUP


Transmission condition settings

Make settings for host transmission. There are two types of setting.

1) Hardware settings on the host.

2) Settings related to the transmitted data.

Refer to Appendix D, OUTPUT FORMAT for the communications specification to the host.

1) Host hardware settingsThis instrument can output data via RS-232C port or LAN port, with corresponding hardware

settings.

Set Items Explanation

Port No. Set the COM port number. (port 1 or 2)

Baud rate Select the baud rate, from 1,200/4,800/9,600/19,200/28,800/ 38,400.

Character Size Select seven bit or eight bit character length.

Parity Select parity, from Even/Odd/None.

Stop bit Select the stop bit, from 1/2.

Class Select the transfer protocol (CLASSA/CLASSB).

Delay time Set the interval between frame data transmissions. Set the time inone second units by entering the value (0–15).

Table 9-1: [System Parameters] dialog – RS-232C settings

Set Items Explanation

IP Address Set the LAN address (*4), an integer in the range 0-255.




Port No. Set the host port number.

Delay Time Set the interval between frame transmissions.

Table 9-2: [System Parameters] dialog – LAN settings

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



SYSTEM SETUP


IP addresses are set as follows:

***. ***. ***. ***

Address *1

Address *2

Address *3

Address *4

2) Settings related to the transmitted data

Besides test results, particularity tables, form tables and scattergrams can be selected as data for

transmission to the host computer, by setting [Transmission] – [Auto Transmission] under

[System Parameters].

If the setting for Automatic transmission (serial) or Automatic transmission (LAN) is set to

[Apply], data will be sent to the host automatically with each test.

Host data automatic transmission

By setting the transmission block and automatic transmission in [Settings] – [System

Parameters], you can select the data to be sent to the host and select whether or not results are

sent to the host automatically after measurement.

Size-Data Table transmission: When this is set to Apply, the particle diameter table data is

transmitted after the default send data.

Shape-Data transmission: When this is set to Apply, the form table data is transmitted

after that.

Scattergram transmission: When this is set to Apply, the scattergram data is transmitted

after that.

Extension analysis transmission When this is set to Apply, exhancing analysis data is

transmitted after that.Auto transmission (serial): When this is set to Apply, after measurement, the results are

automatically transmitted to the host via serial

communications.

Auto transmission (LAN): When this is set to Apply, after measurement, the results are

automatically transmitted to the host via the network.

Select Transmission Data: All/Normal/Abnormal

When All is selected, all data is transmitted whether it is

normal or abnormal.

When you select Normal data, only the normal data is

transmitted.

When you select Abnormal data, only the abnormal data is

transmitted.



SYSTEM SETUP


2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S)

2.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics

Particle images are captured with the most appropriate focusing conditions by focusing the

objective lens on the flat sample layer that is formed in the flow cell by a sheath flow.This flat sheath formation is highly influenced by the sheath fluid flow and the physical

characteristics of the sheath fluid, such as viscosity and specific gravity.

When a high viscosity fluid, such as 2-propernol, is used as a sheath fluid instead of PARTICLE

SHEATH, for example, the sample flow is not thin enough in the flow cell and poorly focused

images will be obtained. In this case, the sheath fluid flow is increased compared with that of

PARTICLE SHEATH, and sample flow is given with a bigger shearing stress to form a thinner flat

sheath flow as similar to that with PARTICLE SHEATH.

Accordingly, when a lower viscosity fluid, such as methanol, is used as a sheath fluid, a sample is

widely spread and the flat sheath formation becomes unstable. In this case, the sheath fluid flow is

decreased compared with that of PARTICLE SHEATH, and sample flow is given with a smaller

shearing stress to form a stable flat sheath flow as similar to that with PARTICLE SHEATH.

It is necessary to control the fluid flow of the sample and sheath fluid in accordance with the

physical characteristics of the sheath fluid to be used.

FPIA-3000S employs 2 sets of the syringes driven by a stepper motor to allow a control of the

sample flow and the sheath flow individually and to form the most suitable flat sheath.

CAUTION

• Depending on the physical characteristics (viscosity and specific gravity)

of the organic solvent to be used, there is a potential that the mostsuitable flat sheath formation may not be obtained in the tolerable rangeof the syringe speed adjustment by the FPIA-3000S. In this case,

reselect the dispersion medium and the sheath fluid.



SYSTEM SETUP


2.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings

When any organic solvent other than the PARTICLE SHEATH is used as a sheath fluid, change

the following hardware setting values according to the physical characteristics (viscosity and

specific gravity) of the sheath fluid.

2.2.1. Sheath syringe speed setting value

Based on the sheath syringe speed Vp when PARTICLE SHEATH is used, the sheath syringe speed

Vs when an organic solvent is used can be calculated using with the viscosity and the specific

gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH and the organic solvent.

Set Items Descriptions

Sheath formation syringe speed Adjusts the sheath flow in the flow cell by changing the pulse persecond (PPS) of the stepper motor which drives the sheathformation syringe.

Sample aspiration syringe speed Adjusts the sample suspension flow to feed from the samplemixing chamber to the flow cell by changing the pulse per second(PPS) of the stepper motor which drives the sample injectionsyringe.

Rinse fluid pressure Adjusts the rinse sheath flow supplied to the sample mixingchamber and the flow cell by changing the set pressure (MPa) ofthe rinse pressure regulator.

Gas sensor level Adjusts the sensitivity of the gas sensor that detects the leakageof the organic solvent.

Table 9-3: Hardware setting items to adjust for the sheath fluid characteristics

CAUTION• FPIA-3000S controls the temperature of the optical detector unit and the

sheath fluid at 25ºC. Use the physical characteristics (viscosity andspecific gravity) of the sheath fluid at 25ºC in the following calculations of

the sheath formation syringe speed and the rinse pressure.

Sheath syringe speed Vs is calculated as follows.

Vs = Vp * (µs/ ρs)/(µp/ ρp)

= Vp * νs/ νp

Here, µs is the viscosity of the applied organic solvent at 25ºC (mPa•s).µp is the viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC (mPa•s).

ρs is the specific gravity of the organic solvent at 25ºC (no unit).

ρp is the specific gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC (no unit).

νs is the kinematic viscosity of the organic solvent at 25ºC (m2 /s).

νp is the kinematic viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC (m2 /s).



SYSTEM SETUP


An example is shown below to calculate the sheath forming syringe speed Vs when using the

toluene as a sheath fluid.

Therefore, Vs = Vp * (µs/ ρs)/(µp/ ρp)

= 600 *(0.553/0.862)/(0.890/0.997)

= 431 pps

Item Set value and physical value

Vp: Sheath forming syringe speedwhen using the PARTICLE SHEATH

600 pps in the HPF mode

600 pps in the LPF mode

µp: Viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC 0.890 mPa•s

ρp: Specific gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC 0.997

Table 9-4: Physical characteristics of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC


µs: Viscosity of the toluene at 25ºC 0.553 mPa•s

ρs: Specific gravity of the toluene at 25ºC 0.862

Table 9-5: Physical characteristics of the toluene at 25ºC

NOTE: • The set range of the sheath forming speed Vs in the FPIA-3000S is shown inthe following.

Depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent to beused as a sheath fluid, the sheath forming syringe speed Vs may be calculatedas an outside value of the set range stated above.If Vs is calculated below the lower limit value, set at the lower limit value. If the

Vs is calculated over the upper limit value, set at the upper limit value.

In this case, particle images may not be well focused or the detected number

of particles may be slightly lower than the actual, since the flat sheath formingconditions are not the most appropriate.

350 pps Vs 900 pps≤ ≤

If Vs calculated < 350 pps, then set value = 350 pps.If Vs calculated > 900 pps, then set value = 900 pps.



SYSTEM SETUP


2.2.2. Sample aspiration syringe speed setting value

The sample aspiration syringe speed Us when an organic solvent is used as a sheath fluid is set to

the common value as the sample aspiration syringe speed Up when the PARTICLE SHEATH is

used.

The sample aspiration syringe speed Us = Up = 400 pps

NOTE: • When the sample aspiration syringe speed is set as Us = Up = 400 pps as

stated above, the number of detected particles may become very low or veryhigh depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent.In this case, prepare a known concentration sample, and readjust the sample

aspiration syringe speed Us by using the analysis results of the known sampleto adjust the number of particles, as follows.

1) Procedures to make a known concentration sample

Using the focus adjustment particle (melamine resign MF-R-2.0) described in Chapter4, prepare a sample with a known concentration.(1) Using the following formula, measure the Mg weight of the focus adjustment

particle (melamine resign particle MF-R-2.0).

Here, ρ: particle density (= 1.51 g/cm3)D: particle diameter (= 2 µm)V: sample volume to be preparedCONC: concentration of the sample to be prepared

For example, when 100 mL of the sample of which concentration is approximately30000 particles per µL is prepared, M = approx. 19 mg.

(2) Mono-disperse the Mg of the focus adjustment particle (melamine resign particleMF-R-2.0) in the specific volume of the organic solvent. To accelerate dispersionof the particles, add an appropriate amount of the dispersant according to theorganic solvent to be used, and use the ultrasonic dispersing devices asrequired.

2) Re-adjustment of the sample aspiration syringe speedAfter the explained settings for the sheath fluid are entered in the analysis software,run the known concentration sample prepared in the step 1) above.If analyzed sample concentration is lower than that calculated, heighten the settingvalue of the sample aspiration syringe speed.If analyzed sample concentration is higher than that calculated, lower the setting valueof the sample aspiration syringe speed.

M = ρ (πD3 /6) V CONC



SYSTEM SETUP


2.2.3. Setting value for the rinse pressure

In each run cycle, FPIA-3000S automatically rinses hydraulic parts, such as the sample mixing

chamber and flow cell, in which the sample passes through, using the sheath fluid. The flow of the

rinse fluid is affected by the viscosity of the applied sheath fluid.

Based on the rinse pressure regulator setting value Pp when using the PARTICLE SHEATH, the

rinse pressure Ps for the applied organic solvent is calculated by using the viscosities of thePARTICLE SHEATH and the applied organic solvent.

An example is shown below to calculate the rinse pressure Pp when using the toluene as a sheath

fluid.

Ps = Pp * (µs/ µp)

= 600 *(0.553/0.890)

= 0.061 MPa

Calculation of the rinse pressure Ps:

Ps = Pp (µs/ µp)

Here, µs is the viscosity of the applied organic solvent at 25ºC (mPa•s).

µp is the viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25ºC (mPa•s).


Pp: Rinse pressure when using the PARTICLE SHEATH 0.098 MPa

Table 9-6: Rinse pressure when using the PARTICLE SHEATH

NOTE: • The set range of the rinse pressure Ps in the FPIA-3000S is shown below.

Depending on the viscosity of the organic solvent to be used as a sheath fluid,the rinse pressure Ps may be calculated as an outside value of the set rangestated above.If the calculated Vs exceeded the upper limit of the set range, set to the upper

limit value.

Ps ≤ 0.098 MPa

When the calculated Ps > 0.098 MPa, Ps set value = 0.098 MPa.



SYSTEM SETUP


2.2.4. Setting value for the gas sensor level

FPIA-3000S employs a gas sensor built within the instrument to detect any leakage of the organic

solvent. The gas sensor detection level can be selected from 4 levels depending on the applied

sheath fluid. [Level 1] is the most sensitive, and [Level 4] is the least sensitive.

2.2.5. Sheath fluid setting

Register the sheath syringe speed, the sample aspiration syringe speed, the rinse pressure and the

gas sensor level which are calculated or determined for the applied organic solvent in the FPIA-

3000S analysis software.

1) Starting the sheath fluid setting menu:

Select from menu bar [Settings] - [Sheath Liquid Settings] in the FPIA-3000S analysis

software. A dialog will be displayed as shown in Figure 9-3 “Setting Parameters Depending

on Sheath fluid”.

Figure 9-3: Setting Parameter Depending on the Sheath fluid

WARNING• If an appropriate gas sensor level is not set accordingly to the applied

organic solvent, there is a potential that fire or explosion occurs as theFPIA-3000S will not detect the leakage of the organic solvent.

CAUTION• Since the gas sensor sensitivity is different on each organic solvent, set

the gas sensor sensitivity according to the organic solvent to be used.• Refer to Appendix E, GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF

FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS, for the popularorganic solvents.

• Consult with your Sysmex service representative for the sensor level

setting value that is not listed in the Table E-1.

NOTE: • FPIA-3000S analysis software has 5 types of the sheath fluid setting values forthe PARTICLE SHEATH, methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, ethylene glycol25wt% solution (whose dissolvent is PARTICLE SHEATH), as factory default

values.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



SYSTEM SETUP


2) Additional registration of a sheath fluid

When the [Addition] button shown in Figure 9-3 is pressed, a dialog shown in Figure 9-4 will

be displayed and an organic solvent can be added as a sheath fluid candidate. Type in the

sheath fluid name in the edit box, and press the [Registration] button. A new sheath fluid of

which name is as typed in will be registered.

Figure 9-4: Adding a new sheath fluid (an example of toluene)

3) Changing the added sheath fluid hardware settings:

When the [Registration] button is pressed as shown in Figure 9-4, a dialog will be displayed

with the sheath fluid name added and its hardware setting items. Change the values as

calculated accordingly by referring to 2.2.1 through 2.2.4 in this Chapter.

Figure 9-5: Changing the hardware settings (an example of toluene)

Click the [Apply] button shown in Figure 9-5, and the added sheath fluid settings are registered in

the FPIA-3000S analysis software and are displayed when the system is starting up or in the sheath

fluid selection menu when the sheath fluid is replaced.

CAUTION• Immediately after a new sheath fluid is registered, setting values of the

PARTICLE SHEATH are entered as default values. Make sure to

change the setting values accordingly to the applied sheath fluid.

NOTE: • In the same procedures described in 3) above, it is also possible to select aregistered sheath fluid and to change setting values for a new sheath fluid.




Chapter 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERS

1. Analysis parameters..................................................................................10-1



ANALYSIS PARAMETERS


1. Analysis parameters

The analysis parameters can be set here.

The analysis parameters set here can limit the displays of the limit axis parameter change list box

in the analysis result display, the Diameter list box in the measurement condition setting dialog, and

the Shape list box. The parameters whose checkmarks were removed in the analysis parametersetting dialog are not displayed in the list boxes above.

Figure 10-1: [Analysis parameters]dialog(1)

Select Enable or Disable and click a checkbox on the analysis parameter setting dialog.

If you press [OK] button, a following dialog which allows you to confirm its message will be

shown. Then, click [OK] button.

Figure 10-2: [Analysis parameters]dialog(2)

Enable/Disable information in the analysis parameter dialog will become effective after the FPIA-

3000 restarts.



ANALYSIS PARAMETERS


Blank page.




Chapter 11 DISPLAY SETUP

1. View settings ............................................................................................. 11-11.1 View settings – Record list ..................................................................11-2

1.2 View settings – Result (Graph) ...........................................................11-31.3 View settings – Result (List)................................................................11-61.4 View settings – Graph (Trend-View) ................................................... 11-71.5 View settings – Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................ 11-9



DISPLAY SETUP


1. View settings

Display-related settings can be made.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [View settings].

The following sub-menus will be displayed. The following sub-menus will be displayed.

Item Functions

Record List Set the display items etc. for the Record List screen.

Results (Graph) Set the graph display colors etc. for the Analysis results screen.

Results (List) Set the parameter view positions and view selections in the analysis resultscreen.

Graph (Trend-View) Set the graph colors etc. for use on the Graph (trend) screen.

Graph (Overlay-View) Set the graph display colors etc. for use on the Graph(Overlay-View) screen.

Table 11-1: [View settings] submenus



DISPLAY SETUP


1.1 View settings – Record list

Set the display items etc. for the [Record List] screen.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [View settings] – [Record List].


Items displayed in the selection list are those displayed in the current [Record List] screen.

Figure 11-1: [Record List] dialog

Item FunctionsMove (add) all headings to the Selected list.

Move (add) the selected headings to the Selected list.

Move (add) the selected headings to the Unselected list.

Move (add) all headings to the Unselected list.

Raise the display position of the selected heading.

Lower the display position of the selected heading.

Fixed Column Set the number of items that should always be displayed.

Automatic The widths of list display columns are adjusted automatically.

Default The settings will be reset to the factory defaults.

OK Save the settings.


Table 11-2: [Record List] dialog items



DISPLAY SETUP


1.2 View settings – Result (Graph)

Set the graph display colors etc. for the [Result Graph] screen.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [View settings] – [Result (Graph)].


Figure 11-2: [Result Graph] dialog



DISPLAY SETUP


Item Item Functions

SizeHistgram

Frequency graph Set the Frequency graph display colors.

Cumulative graph Set the Cumulative graph display colors.

Frequency scale Set the frequency scale automatically or manually. If youremove the check from Auto, the scale is set manually. At this

time, the “Fix to **%” input item is used as the upper limit forthe scale.

Frequency scale- Main Scale Pitch

Sets the main scale pitch for the frequency scale.

Frequency scale- Number of Sub-Scales

Sets the number of auxiliary lines between the main scale ofthe frequency scale.

Parameter scale- Number of Sub-Scales

Sets the number of auxiliary lines between the main scale ofthe particle distribution axis.

ShapeHistgram

Frequency graph Set the Frequency graph display colors.

Cumulative graph Set the Cumulative graph display colors.

Frequency scale Set the frequency scale automatically or manually. If youremove the check from Auto, the scale is set manually. At thistime, the “Fix to **%” input item is used as the upper limit forthe scale.

Frequency scale- Main Scale Pitch

Sets the main scale pitch for the frequency scale.

Frequency scale- Number of Sub-Scales

Sets the number of auxiliary lines between the main scale ofthe particle form distribution axis.

Parameter scale- Main Scale Pitch

Set the main scale value for the particle form axis.

Parameter scale- Number of Sub-Scales

Sets the number of auxiliary lines between the main scale ofthe particle form distribution.

Scattergram Upper Scattergram

number

Set the dot display colors for the upper limit and its above limit.

Middle RangeFrequency

Set the dot display color for the midpoint width, which iscalculated from the set upper limit and lower limit widths.

Lower Scattergramnumber

Set the dot display colors for the lower limit and its below limit.

Marked Data Set the color used when a par ticle has been marked asselected within the image display.

ForeColor Set the text color for the cell size distribution, particle form andscattergram.

BackColor Set the background color for the cell size distribution, particleform and scattergram.

Out of Selection Set the color for the area outside the limits on the Analysisresults screen.

Default Set the settings to the factory defaults.

OK Carry out the settings.

Cancel Cancel the settings.

Table 11-3: [Result Graph] dialog



DISPLAY SETUP


Color settings

The method for setting colors is as described below.

1 Click on the color buttons on the [Result Graph] dialog.


Figure 11-3: [Color ] dialog

2 To use colors which do not appear in this dialog, click on the [Define Custom Colors] button.

The user can set any color.

After setting, click on the [OK] button.

Figure 11-4: [Color ] dialog

3 Select the color.


The selected color is set.



DISPLAY SETUP


1.3 View settings – Result (List)

You can set the view positions of the data in the analysis result screen and select the view of the

screen.

1 Select [Menu] - [Settings] - [View Settings] - [Results (List)].


Figure 11-5: [Results (list)] dialog

When each of the Results (Rectangle limitation) and Results (Polygon limitation) is pressed, the

view position can be changed in the analysis result screen for the specified analysis result

parameter.

Item Functions

Move (add) the all row items to "Selected list".

Move (add) the selected row items to the "Selected list".

Move (add) the selected row items to the "Reserved list".

Move (add) the all row items to the "Reserved list".

Raise the view position of the selected row items.

Lower the view position of the selected row items.

Default Return the settings to the factory defaults.



Table 11-4: [Results (list)] Dialog Items



DISPLAY SETUP


1.4 View settings – Graph (Trend-View)

Set the graph colors etc. for use on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [View settings] – [Graph(Trend-View)].


Figure 11-6: [Graph(Trend-View)] dialog



DISPLAY SETUP


Item Item Functions

SizeParameters

Mean To make average particle diameter a display item, check it andset the display color.

Mode To make mode diameter a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

50% To make 50% diameter a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

Upper(%) To make upper diameter (%) a display item, check it and setthe display color.

Lower(%) To make lower diameter (%) a display item, check it and setthe display color.

SD/CV To make particle diameter SD/CV a display item, check it andset the display color. SD and CV can not be displayed at thesame time.

ForeColor Set the text color.

BackColor Set the background color.ShapeParameter

Menu To make average value a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

Mode To make mode value a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

50% To make 50% value a display item, check it and set the displaycolor.

Upper(%) To make upper value (%) a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

Lower(%) To make lower value (%) a display item, check it and set thedisplay color.

SD/CV To make particle form SD/CV a display item, check it and setthe display color. SD and CV can not be displayed at the sametime.


BackColor Set the background color.

Default Set the settings to the factory defaults.

OK Carry out the settings.

Cancel Cancel the settings.

Table 11-5: [Graph(Trend-View)] settings

NOTE: For details on the color settings, refer to Chapter 11, 1.2 View settings – Result (Graph) Color settings.



DISPLAY SETUP


1.5 View settings – Graph (Overlay-View)

Set the graph display colors etc. for use on the Graph(Overlay-View) screen.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [View settings] – [Graph(Overlay-View)].


Figure 11-7: [Graph(Overlay-View)] dialog

Item Functions

#1 DataColor – #10 DataColor Set the display colors for up to 10 test data selected on the Recordlist screen.


BackColor Set the background color.

Default Return the settings to the factory defaults.



Table 11-6: [Graph(Overlay-View)] dialog

NOTE: For details on the color settings, refer to Chapter 11, 1.2 View settings – Result (Graph) Color settings.



DISPLAY SETUP


Blank page.




Chapter 12 PRINT FORMAT

1. Print format................................................................................................12-11.1 Importing File ...................................................................................... 12-2

1.2 Saving Files - All Data......................................................................... 12-41.3 Saving Files - Selected Data............................................................... 12-41.4 New format creation and editing .........................................................12-51.5 [Save New] button............................................................................. 12-241.6 [Delete] button...................................................................................12-241.7 [Preview] button ................................................................................12-25



PRINT FORMAT


1. Print format

Print formats can be edited and registered.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [Print format Settings].


Figure 12-1: [Print Format Settings] dialogItem Functions

Record List tab Set the print format for lists.

Analysis Results tab Set the print format for analysis results.

ParticleImage tab Set the print format for image data.

Graph (Trend-View) tab Set the print format for Graph (trend).

Multi Scattergrams tab Set the print format for Multi Scattergrams.

Graph(Overlay-View) tab Set the print format for Graph(Overlay-View).

Size Frequency tab Set the print format for particle diameter frequency.

Shape Frequency tab Set the print format for particle form frequency.

User definition tab Set a print format with user-defined parameters.

New button Creates a new version of the print format.

Edit button Edits the print format.

Delete button Deletes the print format.

Preview button Displays a preview of the print format.

Close button Close the dialog.

[File] - [Import] Import the print format stored in the exterior unit.

[File] - [Save] - [All Data] Save the all print formats recorded in the FPIA-3000.

[File] - [Save] - [Selected Data] Save the print formats default-set in the FPIA-3000 in the exterior unit.

[File] - [Preview] Displays a preview of the relevant print format.

[Edit] - [New] Create the relevant print format newly

[Edit] - [Edit] Edit and create the relevant print format.

[Edit] - [Delete] Delete the relevant print format.

Table 12-1: [Print Format Settings] dialog items



PRINT FORMAT


This [Print Format Settings] dialog can also be displayed by selecting [Menu] – [File] –

[Print] – [Print Format Settings].

1.1 Importing File

When [File] - [Import] menu is selected from the print format setting dialog, the following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-2: [Print format selection] dialog

Select the file you want to use from the file name selection area in the print format selection dialog

and press the [Open] button.

The relevant file format is imported.

NOTE: Testing result (Standard) display is the default setting of the display format in theanalysis result tab. However a format which can be printed with information of the

cumulative frequency result is also installed and can be used.



PRINT FORMAT


• When the information in the format file to be imported and the format information recorded in the

FPIA-3000 are the same, the following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 12-3: [FPIA-3000] dialog

When the recorded format is saved as new name, press the [ Yes] button. The following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-4: [Setting print format name] dialog

Input the print format name and comments, and press the [OK] button. The recorded print format

is stored in the FPIA-3000 as the specified name.

When you press the [No] button in the [FPIA-3000] dialog, the imported format is replaced with

the recorded one.

Figure 12-5: [Print Format Settings] dialog

The Printing Format which is saved as another name.



PRINT FORMAT


1.2 Saving Files - All Data

When [File] - [Save] - [All Data] menu is done in the print format setting dialog, the following


Figure 12-6: [Save New as] dialog

Select the place you want to save the data, input the file name in the file name list box and press the

[Save] button.

The print format file will be saved in the selected file folder.

1.3 Saving Files - Selected Data

When [File] - [Save] - [Selected Data] menu is done in the print format setting dialog, the

following dialog will be displayed.

The following process is the same as 2 Saving Files - All Data.

When [All Data] is selected, the all recorded print formats are saved in the specified file, but when

[Selected Data] is selected, only the print formats selected as the defaults in the print format

setting dialog are saved in the specified file.

NOTE: The print format file name should be **.spf.



PRINT FORMAT


1.4 New format creation and editing

Follow the procedure below to edit a print format as a new format.

1 Press the [Analysis Results] tab.

2 When creating a new print format, press the [New] button.


Figure 12-7: [Editting List Print Format] dialog

Item Explanation

Components for graphic(icons)

Left click the component icon to place, then drag it into the print formatarea.

Paper size Select the size (height and width) of the paper as A4/A3/B4/B5/letter.

Preview Display a preview of the created print layout.

Del Specify a certain placed component and delete it.

DelAll Delete all placed components.

Save New Save the created and edited print layout.

Replace Overwrite the created and edited print layout.

Cancel Close the print layout without saving.

Bring to Front The selected parts will be displayed in the front side by pressing [Bringto Front] after selecting the parts arranged in the print form in the formdesign dialog.

Send to Back The selected parts will be displayed in the back side by pressing [Sendto Back] after selecting the parts arranged in the print form in the formdesign dialog.

Table 12-2: [Editting List Print Format] dialog items

Components forgraphic icons

Print form



PRINT FORMAT


3 When creating an existing print format, press the [Edit] button.

Enable editing of a print layout.

4 To edit, select the part you want to print by clicking its icon on the left, move it to the desired

print position by moving the mouse while holding its left button down (dragging), decide the

size, then release. The print image of the selected part is displayed on the print form. The data

displayed at the part is the data selected in the record list.The grid (one grid is approx. 1.3 mm (75 twip)) will be displayed in the print form. You can

move the parts with the mouse by the unit of the grid.

5 With the arrow parts icon selected, if you select the part, you can move the part and change its size.

6 Also, you can change the print method by right clicking the mouse cursor on the part. (This

function is only for parts with setting values.)

7 There are two types of drawing parts. Which you can use depends on the tab selected before

starting editing.

• Form type: Print form straddling multiple records

Table, scattergram (trend), graph (trend), graph (overlay)

Icon Item Explanation

Arrow Used to select the positioned part.

Line This part prints a line.

Text This part prints text.

Picture This part prints a bitmap file.

Table This part prints a table.

Trend graph This part prints a trend graph.

Trend graph statistics This part prints the statistical values for a trend graph.

Graph overlay This part prints an overlay graph.

Overlay graph table This part prints a table showing the meanings of the

lines in the overlay graph.

Scatter graph This part prints a scatter graph.

Measurement analysisconditions

This part prints the measurement analysis conditions.

Table 12-3: Form making parts list



PRINT FORMAT


• Cut form type: Print form for a single record

Analysis results, image display, particle diameter frequency, particle form frequency, user

defined parameters

Icon Item Explanation

Arrow Used to select the positioned part.

Line This part prints a line.

Text This part prints text.

Picture This part prints a bitmap file.

Scatter graph This part prints a scatter graph.

Particle histogram This part prints a particle histogram.

Particle form histogram This part prints a particle form histogram.

Measurement analysisconditions


Particle image This part prints a particle image.

Measurement resultsselection display

This part prints the measurement results. The items tobe printed can be set.

Measurement analysis

conditions selection display


The items to be printed can be set.

Frequency tables This part prints a frequency table. The particle diameter

frequency or particle form frequency can be selected.

Cumulative frequency This part prints a cumulative frequency.

Table 12-4: Drawing parts table

Note: Left Click a particle image component in the print layout to select, and right click to

display the detailed information about the component. Enter a value of the maximumpage number to specify how many copies of the image will be printed.



PRINT FORMAT


Line: Property Settings

When you place the line part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog will

be displayed.

Figure 12-8: [Line: Property Settings] dialog

Property item Functions

X1 ~ X2 Change the horizontal positions of the arrow ends by unit.

Y1 ~ Y2 Change the vertical positions of the arrow ends by unit.

Table 12-5: Plotter Parts List

NOTE: A unit is approx. 0.018 mm (1 twip).



PRINT FORMAT


Character (Label): Property Setting

When you press the character part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-9: [Label: Property Setting] dialog


Input Characters Input characters to be displayed.

Character Alignment Align the input characters to Left, Right or Center.

Font Select the fonts registered in the Windows OS.

Bold Select Apply or Not Apply for the bold display.

Italic Select Apply or Not Apply for the italic display.

Font size Set the font size between 6 and 72.

Underline Select Apply or Not Apply for the underline.

Fore Color Set the fore color.Double click on the fore color area to display the color settingdialog.

Top Taking the upper left of the print form for origin, set the verticaldistance from the form origin to the upper left of the part.(Hereinafter referred to as Top.)

Left Taking the upper left of the print form for origin, set the horizontaldistance from the form origin to the upper left of the part.(Hereinafter referred to as Left.)

Height Set the vertical length of the part.

(Hereinafter referred to as Height.)

Width Set the horizontal length of the part.(Hereinafter referred to as Width.)

Table 12-6: Label: Property Setting Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Graph (Trend-View): Property SettingsWhen the Graph (Trend-View) part is placed in the print form and the part is right clicked on, the


Figure 12-10: [Graph (Trend-View): Property Settings] dialog

NOTE: • The unit of the Top, Left, Height and Width is approx. 0.018 mm (1 twip).• The configuration of the Top, Left, Height and Width is as follows.


Display Data Selection Select the data of the part to be displayed from X/Y axis.

Top Set the Top information on the Graph (Trend-View).

Left Set the Left information on the Graph (Trend-View).

Height Set the Height information on the Graph (Trend-View).

Width Set the Width information on the Graph (Trend-View).

Table 12-7: Graph (Trend-View): Property Settings Dialog Items

Width

HeightLeft

Top

Print Form

Parts



PRINT FORMAT


Picture: Property Settings

When you place the picture part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-11: [Picture: Property Settings] dialog


Picture file Select the Picture file.When the picture fie area double clicked on, the picture filesettings dialog will be displayed.The file properties you can select are BMP, JPEG and ICO files.

Top Set the Top information on the picture part.

Left Set the Left information on the picture part.

Height Set the Height information on the picture part.

Width Set the Width information on the picture part.

Table 12-8: Picture: Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings

When you place the Graph (Overlay-View) part in the print form and the part is right clicked on,

the following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 12-12: [Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings] dialog


Display Data Selection Select the data of the part to be displayed from Diameterfrequency distribution, Shape frequency distribution andcumulative.

Top Set the Top information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.

Left Set the Left information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.

Height Set the Height information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.

Width Set the Width information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.

Table 12-9: Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Record List: Property Settings

When you place the record list part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-13: [Record List: Property Settings] dialog


Top Set the Top information on the record list part.

Left Set the Left information on the record list part.

Height Set the Height information on the record list part.

Width Set the Width information on the record list part.

Table 12-10: Record List: Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Scattergram: Property Settings

When you place the Scattergram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following


Figure 12-14: [Scattergram: Property Settings] dialog


Index For the document type (this type is not provided for the cut papertype), the index of the part placed in the print form is used formatching with the testing/analysis parameter part.When the part is placed in the position corresponding to the indexwhich is the same in the Scattergram property and test/analysisparameter, the data matching property is maintained.

Top Set the Top information on the Scattergram part.

Left Set the Left information on the Scattergram part.

Height Set the Height information on the Scattergram part.

Width Set the Width information on the Scattergram part.

Table 12-11: Scattergram: Property Settings Dialog Items

Index : 1

Index : 1

Testing/analysisParameter

Scattergram

Index : 2

Index : 2

Testing/analysisParameter

Scattergram

Same records



PRINT FORMAT


Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings

When you place the testing/analysis parameters part in the print form and right click on the part, the


Figure 12-16: [Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings] dialog


Tested Select Display or Not Display on the part.

ReAnalyzed Select Display or Not Display on the part.

ReAnalysis Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Measurer name Select Display or Not Display on the part.

ReAnalyzed by Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Sample name Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Sample number Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Sample type Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Comment Select Display or Not Display on the part.

SOP Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Power Field Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Count method Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Sheath Liquid Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Field Lens Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Light field system Select Display or Not Display on the part.Selection data Save Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Merging data Select Display or Not Display on the part.

Index For the document type (this type is not provided for the cut papertype), the index of the part placed in the print form is used formatching with the testing/analysis parameter part.For details, refer to "Scattergram: Property Settings".

Table 12-13: Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings



PRINT FORMAT


X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings

When you place the X-axis histogram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following


Figure 12-17: [X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings] dialog

Top Set the Top information on the Testing/Analysis parameter part.

Left Set the Width information on the Testing/Analysis parameter part.


Top Set the Top information on the X-axis histogram part.

Left Set the Left information on the X-axis histogram part.

Height Set the Height information on the X-axis histogram part.

Width Set the Width information on the X-axis histogram part.

Table 12-14: X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings Dialog Items


Table 12-13: Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings



PRINT FORMAT


Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings

When you place the Y-axis histogram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following


Figure 12-18: [ Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings] dialog


Top Set the Top information on the Y-axis histogram part.

Left Set the Left information on the Y-axis histogram part.

Height Set the Height information on the Y-axis histogram part.

Width Set the Width information on the Y-axis histogram part.

Table 12-15: Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Particle Image: Property Settings

When you place the particle image part in the print form and right click on the part, the following


Figure 12-19: [Particle Image: Property Settings] dialog

Property Functions

Analyzed Parameter Display Select the information displayed under the particle image fromDisplay or Not Display of No Parameter, X axis parameter orY axis parameter

Display Size Select particle image size from 2X, 4X, 8X or 10X.

Sort Select the particle image display from the order of frame, X axisascending frame, descending order of X axis, Y axis ascendingorder Descending order of Y axis.

Number of max. print pages Set the number of printing pages.When 0 is set to, all images can be printed.

Top Set the Top information on the particle image part.

Left Set the Left information on the particle image part.

Height Set the Height information on the particle image part.

Width Set the Width information on the particle image part.

Boundary line Select the particle image boundary line from Apply or Not Apply.

Mark Display Select from All particles, Marked particles, or No MarkedParticles. Mark particles image, No mark particles image of theparticles image list and all particles image will be shown.

Table 12-16: Particle Image: Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Results: Property Settings

When you press the result parts in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog

will be displayed.

Figure 12-20: [Results: Property Setting] dialog


Display Items Input analysis results to be displayed.

Character Alignment Align the input characters to Left, Right or Center.

Font Select the fonts registered in the Windows OS.

Bold Select Apply or Not Apply for the bold display.

Italic Select Apply or Not Apply for the italic display.

Font size Set the font size between 6 and 72.

Underline Select Apply or Not Apply for the underline.

Fore Color Set the fore color.Double click on the fore color area to display the color settingdialog.

Top Set the Top information on the result part.

Left Set the Left information on the result part.

Height Set the Height information on the result part.

Width Set the Width information on the result part.

Table 12-17: Results: Property Setting Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Frequency Table: Property Settings

When you place the frequency table part in the print form and right click on the part, the following


Figure 12-21: [Frequency Table: Property Settings] dialog


Display Data Selection Select frequency table display from Diameter / Particle frequencydistribution.

Width of display: Range Print the item list of the frequency distr ibution range, numberswithin the range, frequency in the range (%) and cumulation inthe range (%).Set the width of each raw.

Width of display: Number

Width of display: Frequency

Width of display: Cumulation

Top Set the Top information on the frequency table part.Left Set the Left information on the frequency table part.

Height Set the Height information on the frequency table part.

Width Set the Width information on the frequency table part.

Table 12-18: Frequency Table Property Settings Dialog Items



PRINT FORMAT


Settings for the cumulative frequency property

When a cumulative frequency component is allocated in print form, following dialog will be shown

if you click.

Figure 12-22: [Cumulative frequency: Property Settings] dialog

Property item

Top Set the Top information on the cumulative frequency compornent.

Left Set the Left information on the cumulative frequency compornent.

Table 12-19: Cumulative frequency propery settings dialog table.



PRINT FORMAT


Margin Settings

When you click on the area other than the part in the print form, the following dialog will be

displayed.

Figure 12-23: [Margin Settings] dialog

You can set the printing position right from the standard printing position per mm by inputting a

positive number in the column.



PRINT FORMAT


1.5 [Save New] button

Follow the procedure below to save a print format.

1 Press the [Save New] button in the Figure 12-7.


Figure 12-24: [Print Form Name Input] dialog

2 Enter the form name and click on the [OK] button.The print format is saved.

1.6 [Delete] button

Follow the procedure below to delete a print format.

1 Select the print format to delete.

2 Press the [Delete] button.


Figure 12-25: [Deletion of Print Form] dialog

3 Press the [OK] button.

The selected component is deleted.



PRINT FORMAT


1.7 [Preview] button

Follow the procedure below to preview a print format.

1 Select the print record to view as a preview.

Figure 12-26: Print format preview

2 Press the [Preview] button.

The print preview will appear.



PRINT FORMAT


Blank page.




Chapter 13 USER AUTHENTICATION

1. User Authentication ................................................................................... 13-11.1 Change password ...............................................................................13-1

1.2 User Registration ................................................................................13-21.3 Lockout.............................................................................................. 13-141.4 Setting Default Database ..................................................................13-141.5 Change logon user............................................................................ 13-15



USER AUTHENTICATION


1. User Authentication

Accounts can be set for using the FPIA-3000/3000S, with restrictions and settings for logging onto

the system.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [User Authentication].

Selecting it displays sub-menus. The following sub-menus will be displayed.

1.1 Change password

Change the logon password for the user who is currently logged on.

1 Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [User Authentication] – [Change Password].


Figure 13-1: [Change Password] dialog

2 Enter the password and click on the [OK] button.The password is changed.

NOTE: Logon is required when the FPIA-3000/3000S boots up.

Menu Functions

Change password Change the password for the logged-on user.

User Registration Make settings for accounts and logon.

Table 13-1: Submenu items

Item Functions

New password Enter the password to change. The input characters are displayed asasterisks (*). Alphanumeric characters can be entered. The number ofcharacters which can be used is within the range set in [Edit Password/Account] dialog. The input distinguishes between upper case and lowercase characters.

New password (Retype) Re-enter the same password entered under [New password].

Table 13-2: [Change Password] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


1.2 User Registration

Accounts can be set for using the FPIA-3000/3000S, with restrictions and settings for logging onto

the system, and with group settings.This function can only be used by users with administrator rights.

• Select [Menu] – [Settings] – [User Authentication] – [User Registration].


Figure 13-2: [User Registration] dialog

• This dialog has the following three tabs.

CAUTION: This function can only be used by users with administrator rights.

Tab Functions

User Information Users can be added, edited and deleted.

Password/account Password restrictions and logon restrictions etc. can be set here.Group setting Access groups can be set.

Table 13-3: [User Registration] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


1) User Information

Creates a user account for using the FPIA-3000/3000S.

1 Select the [User Information] tab in the user settings dialog.


Figure 13-3: [User Information] dialog

Item Functions

Add Add a new account.

Edit Alter the settings for existing accounts.

Delete Delete existing accounts.

Table 13-4: [User Information] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Adding accounts

Create new accounts.

1 Press the [Add] button on the [User Information] screen.


Figure 13-4: [User Registration] dialog



USER AUTHENTICATION


2 Set the above items and click on the [OK] button.

The account is added.

Item Entry range Explanation

Logon ID Any Enter the logon ID. The input distinguishes between uppercase and lower case characters.

User Name Any Enter the user name. User names cannot be altered oncethey have been registered.

Access Group Set account rights. Access groups set under group settingscan be selected.

Comments Any Enter a comment.

Password Set the password. Alphanumeric characters can beentered. The input characters are displayed as asterisks(*). The number of characters which can be used is withinthe range set for the password account. The inputdistinguishes between upper case and lower casecharacters.

Password Again Re-enter the same password entered under [Password].

Default DB Any C:\ProgramFiles\FPIA-3000\name sample.rbk will be set

as default DB name where above string "name" is youruser name.If you select [OK] button, a message dialog which states"This file does not exist, create the file?" will be shownwhen default DB does not exist. New default DB will becreated if you select [OK] button here.

Account Indefinite Disable the account without deleting the user settings.

Lockout Duration The user can log in until the date set for the account. Anexpiration date warning dialog will be displayed at logon for14 days before expiration. Once the expiration date passes,the user will not be able to log on to the accountconcerned.

Invalid Disable the account and delete the user settings.

PasswordExpiring Date

Indefinite No expiration date is set for the password.

Valid With Timeout An expiration date is set for the password. It is calculatedas a number of days from the date of registration orpassword alteration. An expiration date warning dialog willbe displayed on logon for 14 days before expiration. Oncethe expiration date passes, the user will not be able to logon using the password concerned.

Table 13-5: [User Registration] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Account editing

Alter the settings for existing accounts.

1 Press the [Edit] button on the [User Information] screen.

The following screen will be displayed.

Figure 13-6: [User Information Edit] dialog

CAUTION: The account of the user currently logged on cannot be changed. The dialog belowwill appear if any attempt is made to alter that account.

Figure 13-5: [User Information Edit] dialog



USER AUTHENTICATION


2 Set the above items and click on the [OK] button.

The account is edited.

Item Entry range Explanation

Logon ID Any Enter the logon ID. The input distinguishes between uppercase and lower case characters.

User Name Any Enter the user name. User names cannot be altered oncethey have been registered.

Access Group Set account rights. Access groups set under group settingscan be selected.

Comments Any Enter a comment.

Password Set the password. Alphanumeric characters can beentered. The input characters are displayed as asterisks(*). The number of characters which can be used is withinthe range set for the password account. The inputdistinguishes between upper case and lower casecharacters.

Password Again Re-enter the same password entered under [Password].

Default DB Any Set the database to be used by the user. However, there

must be a database in the set directory.

Account Indefinite No expiration date is set for the account.

Lockout Duration The user can log in until the date set for the account. Anexpiration date warning dialog will be displayed on logonfor 14 days before expiration. Once the expiration datepasses, the user will not be able to log on to the accountconcerned.

Invalid Disable the account and delete the user settings.

PasswordExpiring Date

Indefinite No expiration date is set for the password.

Valid With Timeout An expiration date is set for the password. It is calculatedas a number of days from the date of registration or

password alteration. An expiration date warning dialog willbe displayed on logon for 14 days before expiration. Oncethe expiration date passes, the user will not be able to logon using the password concerned.

Reject Counts Rejected (Times) Shows the number of times in the login dialog that the userID or password was not input correctly so login was notpossible.

[Clear ] button Pressing this button clears the reject count.

Table 13-6: [User Information Edit] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Deleting accounts

Delete existing account settings. The logged on user cannot delete his or her own settings.

1 Select the account to delete from the Edit User Information screen, then click on the [Delete]

button.The following screen will be displayed.

Figure 13-7: [Deletion of User ] dialog


The selected account is deleted.

CAUTION: The account of the user currently logged on cannot be deleted.



USER AUTHENTICATION


2) Password/ account

Make settings for the logon stage.

1 Select the [Password/account] tab in the [User Registration] dialog.


Figure 13-8: [Password/account] dialog

Item Functions

Time-Controled Lockout Set the automatic lockout function.

Account/Lockout Settings Make settings for lockout in case of failed logon.

Password Size Set the number of characters allowed when the password is set.

Limitation of password reuse Set whether the same password can be reused when the password ischanged.

Apply Save the settings. This button is enabled if any setting has beenchanged.

Cancel If the [Apply] or [OK] button have not been clicked, this restores alteredsettings to their previous states.

Table 13-7: [Password/account] dialog items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Time-Controled Lockout

The system can be locked out if there is no operation of the FPIA-3000 within a certain period.

1 Select [ON] under [Time-Controled Lockout] on the [Password/account] screen.

2 Set how many minutes should elapse from the last operation before the lockout acts.

The automatic lockout is set.

The following dialog will be displayed when automatic lockout acts.

Figure 13-9: [Lockout] dialog

1 Enter the password and click on the [OK] button.

The automatic lockout is canceled.

2 If you cannot remember your password and cannot return, press the [Shutdown] button to end

the FPIA-3000 application.

Account/Lockout settings

Lockout settings can be made for cases of failed logon.

1 Select the following items under [Account/Lockout settings] on the [Password/

account] screen.

Item FunctionsOFF Logon attempts will always be accepted, however many are

unsuccessful.

ON (with time restriction) Lockout the account, with a time limit.

ON (with no time restriction) Lockout the account, with no time limit.

XX times Logon error Set the allowable number of entry errors under [Logon ID], [Password]on the Logon screen. The setting range is 1–100. The number ofmistaken entries can be checked from [Reject Counts] in the [UserInformation Edit] window.

XX minutes Lockout Set the lockout duration (unit: minutes) for account locks (with timelimit). The setting range is 1–3,600 minutes.

Table 13-8: [Account/Lockout Settings] items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Password Size

Set the number of characters which can be entered as an account password.


Limitation of Password reuse

When [Permit Password reuse.] is selected under [Limitation of password reuse] on the[Password/account] dialog screen, reuse of passwords can be permitted even after the

expiration of the password.

Also, if [Prohibit password reuse.] is selected and an expiration date is set for user registration

and user-edited passwords, the [Password Expiration Warning] dialog is displayed at login as

in Figure 13-10 from 14 days before the password expires. If you press the button that changes

password, the [Change password] dialog is displayed as in Figure 13-11.

At this time, use of the last password is not permitted. If you input the same password, a warning

like that in Figure 13-12 is displayed.

You can set which passwords cannot be reused by inputting a count next to [Prohibit password

reuse.]. Input “1” to prohibit reuse of the current password, “2” to prohibit reuse of the current

password and the two before it.

Figure 13-10: [Password Expiration Warning] dialog

Figure 13-11: [Change Password] dialog

Figure 13-12: [Password Alteration] dialog



USER AUTHENTICATION


3) Group settings

Settings can be made for account groups, and for the actions which can be carried out by groups.

Initial registrations are made for administrator, manager and operator groups.

User groups can contain up to ten users.

1 Select the [Group setting] tab in the user settings dialog.


Figure 13-13: [Group setting] dialog

Confirmation of user group access permissions

Use the method below to check the access permission status of user groups.

1 Select the name of the group to check from the [Group List].

Check the access permissions list for the selected group.

The Access permissions list contains four tabs: [Function], [System Parameters], [SOP

Parameters] and [Sequence]. Click on the tabs to check the corresponding access permissions.

Item Functions

Function Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in the menu.

System Parameters Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings] –[System Parameters].

SOP Parameters Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings] –[SOP Parameters].

Sequence Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in[Maintenance] – [Run Sequence].

Table 13-9: [Access Permission List] items



USER AUTHENTICATION


Editing user groups

Click on the [Edit] button on the [Group setting] screen to edit group access permissions.

Figure 13-14: [Setting User Groups] dialog

Item Explanation

Group Name Change the group name.

Is group Valid? Select whether the selection in Access group list is enabled or disabled.

Function Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in the menu.

System Settings Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings] –[System Parameters].

SOP settings Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings] –[SOP Parameters].

Sequences Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in[Maintenance] – [Run Sequence].

Table 13-10: [Setting User Groups] items



USER AUTHENTICATION


1.3 Lockout

Select [Settings] – [Lockout] to display the dialog below, rendering the FPIA-3000 inoperable.

Use this function to prevent anyone else from using the system.

Enter the password used to login before and click on the [OK] button to cancel the lock.

Figure 13-15: [Lockout] dialog

If you cannot remember your password and cannot return, press the [Shutdown] button to end the

FPIA-3000 application.

1.4 Setting Default Database

Select [Settings] - [User Authentication] - [Default DB] to display the default database

dialog, as shown in Figure 13-16.

Figure 13-16: [Default DB] dialog

Enter the default database folder in the edit box indicated as (A), click the [Change] button, and

the default database used at the time of log-on can be set.

If you click [Change] button, file select dialog will be shown and the user can select or change its

default DB.

A



USER AUTHENTICATION


1.5 Change logon user

Select [Settings]-[User Authentication] - [Change Logon User ] to display following

dialog.

Figure 13-17: [Change Logon User ] dialog

Enter new logon ID and password in the text box, click the [Change] button.

Configuration information of the FPIA-3000 will be changed according to given new logon ID.



USER AUTHENTICATION


Blank page.




Chapter 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit ............................................ 14-11.1 Adjusting the pressure ........................................................................ 14-1

2. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit ..................................................14-22.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit ............................................14-22.2 Pressure adjustment points................................................................. 14-32.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure .............................................................. 14-42.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure ...................................................... 14-5



SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT


1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit

Pressure and vacuum applied to the testing unit are supplied from the pneumatic unit. The methodfor adjusting compressed air pressure is as described below.

1.1 Adjusting the pressure

The method for adjusting compressed air pressure is as described below.

1 Turn on the testing unit.

The pneumatic unit switches on.

If the pneumatic unit has been turned OFF by the timer, press the [Pneumatic Unit] button on

[Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog.

2 Check the test value of the 0.22 MPa pressure on the device status screen.The target range is 0.22±0.01 MPa. If the pressure is out of the target range, make sure that the

connection tube is not bent or disconnected, then check the pressure again.

If the pressure is still not within the target range, adjust as follows.

3 Turn the fastening screw counter-clockwise.

4 Use the 0.22 MPa Regulator to adjust the pressure to approximately 0.22±0.01 MPa.

Turn clockwise to increase and counter-clockwise to reduce the pressure.

Figure 14-1: Checking the pneumatic unit (compressed air pressure)

5 After making the adjustment, tighten the fastening screw.

NOTE: You cannot test samples and adjust pneumatic unit pressure at the same time. Beforeadjusting pneumatic unit pressure, check that no samples are being tested.

CAUTIONAlways adjust the pressure upward to the specified level. When the pressure istoo high, first lower it below the specified level, then raise it.

High

Low0.22 MPa Regulator

Fastening screw



SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT


2. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit

Pressure and vacuum applied to the testing unit are supplied from the pneumatic unit.

The pressure supplied to the testing unit is readjusted to the required pressure inside the testing unit.

The adjusted pressure in the testing unit is monitored by the instrument. Unless an error relating to

pressure is displayed, there is no need for readjustment.

2.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit

1 Select [Test] – [Test].

The [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.


2 Check the measured pressure values.

If the pressure is outside the normal range, adjust it as shown below.

NOTE: • You cannot test samples and adjust pneumatic unit pressure at the same time.Before adjusting pneumatic unit pressure, check that no samples are beingtested.

• If a pressure-related error is displayed, check the pressure of the pneumaticunit, then check the pressure of the testing unit.



SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT


2.2 Pressure adjustment points

1 Press the area labeled PUSH on the pressure regulator unit cover on the top of the testing unit,

to open the testing unit cover.

2 Check the rinse pressure adjustment regulator and the bellows pressure regulator.

Figure 14-3: Where to check the pressures

Pressure regulator unit cover

Rinse pressure adjustment

regulator

Bellows pressure regulator



SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT


2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure

Check the test value of the -0.05 MPa pressure on the device status screen. If the vacuum is outside

the target range, adjust as follows.

1 Loosen the fastening nut below the knob of the bellows pressure governor by turning it counter-

clockwise.2 While confirming the -0.05 MPa pressure value on the device status screen, adjust the vacuum

by turning the knob of the bellows pressure governor. Turning the knob clockwise raises the

vacuum pressure from -0.04 towards -0.05.

Target range: -0.053±0.005 MPa

Figure 14-4: -0.05 MPa pressure governor

3 After completing the adjustment, tighten the fastening screw.

CAUTIONAlways adjust the pressure upward to the specified level. When the pressure istoo high, first lower it below the specified level, then raise it.

Lock nut




Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE

1. Introduction................................................................................................ 15-1

2. Executing sequences ................................................................................15-12.1 Auto rinse............................................................................................ 15-12.2 Revert from error................................................................................. 15-22.3 Manual focusing ..................................................................................15-22.4 Background Check..............................................................................15-42.5 Sheath liquid exchange....................................................................... 15-52.6 Compressor ON ..................................................................................15-82.7 Cover open/close ................................................................................15-82.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness ......................................................15-82.9 Stir motor adjustment.......................................................................... 15-8

3. Changing fuses ......................................................................................... 15-9

3.1 Changing the fuse in the testing unit...................................................15-93.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit........................................... 15-103.3 Periodic Replacement Parts.............................................................. 15-11

4. Help ......................................................................................................... 15-114.1 Table of Contents.............................................................................. 15-114.2 Version information ........................................................................... 15-11

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



MAINTENANCE


1. Introduction

This chapter explains device maintenance. Refer to the following titles as necessary.

Executing Sequences

This explains the various sequences required for device maintenance.

Replacement of supplies

This explains the methods for replacing supply parts that require periodic replacement.

2. Executing sequences

This section explains how to execute sequences. There are ten types of sequence for device

maintenance.

2.1 Auto rinse

Auto rinsing is used when rinsing the fluid system of the testing unit.

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Auto Rinse].

Sequence name Purpose

Auto Rinse Used for rinsing the fluid unit.

Revert from error Used when an error has occurred during a sequence.

Manual focusing Used for manual focusing.

Auto Focusing Used for automatic focusing. Refer to Chapter 3.

Background check Used for testing background values for the device.

Sheath liquid exchange Used to replace sheath liquid.

Compresson ON Used to cancel the pneumatic unit timer.

Cover open/close Used to manually open and close the cover.

Adjjustment of the flash brightness Used to adjust stroboscope brightness.

Stir motor adjustment Used to adjust the speed of the mixing motor.

Table 15-1: Names of sequences and their purposes

CAUTION• When measuring highly adhesive particles or samples with high particle

concentrations, check to make sure that there is no carryover. Ordinaryrinsing may not be sufficient. When there is carryover, perform theautomatic rinsing sequence.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



MAINTENANCE


2.2 Revert from error

When the testing unit status signal is red, indicating that the unit cannot run tests, it is necessary to

perform the Revert from error sequence.

There are two ways of reverting from errors: Executing this sequence or reverting from the

[Recover ] screen.

The latter method should usually be used. Refer to Chapter 7, 1. Error messages for the method.

When you choose [Recover ], you revert from the error automatically.

If you still cannot revert from the error, refer to Chapter 7, 3. Error messages and troubleshooting .

2.3 Manual focusing

There are two ways of focusing: automatic and manual.

The manual method is explained here. For how to auto focus, refer to Chapter 3, 3.4 Auto Focusing .

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Manual focusing].

The dialog below appears, and the initial process begins.

Figure 15-1: [Manual Focus Sequence] dialog

2 When pre-processing is finished, the following dialog appears.

Figure 15-2: Waiting for start test dialog

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



MAINTENANCE


3 Dispense 5ml of a sample prepared to focus adjusting particle into the sample chamber, as

instructed by the action message. About focus adjusting particle, refer to Appendix F, FOCUS

ADJUSTING SAMPLE .

4 Press the [Start] button. Manual focus adjustment sequence starts, and after a while, particle

images will be displayed on the screen.

Check the images and click , , and buttons to adjust focus. Click on andto move the flow cell by the minimum distance in the direction of the arrow. Click on and

to move by five times the distance produced by clicking on and .

Figure 15-3: [Manual Focus Sequence] dialog

CAUTION• Since the captured particle images displayed in a real-time are observed

with eyes to make focus adjustment in the manual focus adjustment

sequence, an individual variation and an adjustment error will occur.• If a correct analysis result is required, perform the auto focus adjustment

sequence after the manual focus adjustment sequence has beencompleted.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



MAINTENANCE


2.4 Background Check

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Background check].


Figure 15-4: [Start Background Test] dialog

2 Click on the [Run] button.

A background check will be carried out.

When a background check is finished, the following dialog appears.

Figure 15-5: [Background Check Results] dialog

3 To repeat a background check, click on the [Run] button.



MAINTENANCE


2.5 Sheath liquid exchange

1 Click the [Replace Sheath Liquid] button in the testing/analysis condition screen, and the

sheath replacing sequence will start.

Figure 15-6: Starting the sheath fluid replacing sequence

2 Since the following dialog will be displayed to prompt a selection of the sheath fluid, click the

button to select a desired sheath fluid, disconnect the sheath fluid tube on the rear panel, and

connect the selected sheath fluid to the sheath inlet nipple.

Figure 15-7: Selecting a sheath fluid (Sheath fluid replacing sequence)

NOTE: • The sheath fluid replacing sequence can be also started by selecting [Menu] -[Maintenances] - [Sequences] - [Sheath liquid exchange].



MAINTENANCE


3 After connecting the sheath fluid, click the [Run] button in the dialog.

The sheath fluid primed in the testing unit will be started to exhaust.

When the exhausting the sheath fluid is completed, the following dialog will be displayed to

prompt an adjustment of the rinse pressure.

Figure 15-8: Adjustment of the rinse pressure dialog

4 Adjust the rinse pressure regulator so that the measured value becomes the target value. After

adjusting the rinse pressure, click the [Run] button in the dialog.The hydraulic system is rinsed by the connected sheath fluid, and the sheath fluid is then primed.

When priming the sheath fluid is completed, the sheath fluid box shown below will display the

sheath fluid name that is connected and primed.

CAUTION• It is recommended to replace the Teflon tube between the sheath inlet

nipple and the sheath container to avoid contamination of the sheath

fluid. In this case, cut the provided Teflon tube 4 mmID x 6 mmOD in anappropriate length to use.

• There is a potential to generate heat or poisonous gas when the

previous waste in the waste tank is chemically reacted with the newsheath fluid. It is recommended to replace by a new waste tank when thesheath fluid is replaced by a new type.

• Cap the disconnected sheath fluid container, and store in a safe place.

Discard the waste in the waste tank in accordance with the laboratory’s,local and government regulations.

CAUTION• There is a potential to generate heat or poisonous gas when the

previous waste in the waste tank is chemically reacted with the newsheath fluid. When a dialog shown in Figure 15-8 is displayed, replace

by a new waste tank.



MAINTENANCE


Figure 15-9: Displaying the sheath fluid name

5 After the sheath fluid priming is completed, the testing unit becomes ready.

CAUTION• Depending on the physical characteristics of the newly connected

sheath fluid, there may be a case that the new sheath fluid is mixed withresidual sheath fluid in the testing unit hydraulic system and emulsify(emulsion). When the sheath fluid turned emulsion, the analysis result is

drastically affected since the emulsion is detected as particles. When adifferent polar sheath fluid is to be replaced, use the [sheath fluid

replacing] sequence to replace one by an intermediate solvent toprevent sheath from turning into emulsion. For example, when the

PARTICLE SHEATH is desired to replace by toluene, it is effective touse an intermediate solvent of ethanol or 2-propanol to avoid emulsion.

PARTICLE SHEATH

Intermediate solvent (ethanol)

Intermediate solvent (ethanol)

1st step: PARTICLE SHEATH

2nd step: toluene

toluene



MAINTENANCE


2.6 Compressor ON

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Compressor ON].

The pneumatic unit timer is cancelled. The timer can also be cancelled by clicking on the

[Pneumatic Unit] button on the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] screen.

2.7 Cover open/close

1 Select [Test] – [Cover Open/Close]. The cover opens. Click on [Cover Open/close] again

to close the cover.

2.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Adjustment of the flash brightness].

The stroboscope brightness is automatically adjusted to an optimized value.

2.9 Stir motor adjustment

1 Select [Maintenance] – [Sequence] – [Stir motor adjustment].

The rpm of the mixing motor is automatically adjusted to an optimized value.



MAINTENANCE


Figure 15-10: Changing the fuse in the testing unit

3 Check if the fuse is blown.

If the fuse is blown, replace it with the accessory fuse.

4 Connect the fuse in the original fuse position.

5 Connect the power cord.

3.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit

1 Turn off the testing unit power switch, and unplug the power cable that is connected to the

pneumatic unit.

2 Find the fuse holder at the back of the pneumatic unit. Use a minus (-) screwdriver to raise the

clip of the fuse holder on the back of the testing unit, and detach it from the unit.

Figure 15-11: Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit

3 Check if the fuse is blown.

If the fuse is blown, replace it with the accessory fuse.

4 Connect the fuse in the original fuse position.

5 Connect the power cord.



MAINTENANCE


3.3 Periodic Replacement Parts

The dialog below is displayed via [Maintenance] – [Parts Maintenance].

Figure 15-12: [Replacement Of Supply Parts] dialog

You can check the replacement date status for the parts replaced periodically: air filter, syringe

seal, and pinch valve tube.

The time to replace a part comes, an announcement dialog like the one in the figure below isdisplayed in the logon dialog during logon. These parts are replaced by staff from this company, so

please contact the staff responsible for service.

Figure 15-13: [Replacement Of Supply Parts] dialog

This dialog appears only for warning.

Pressing the [Close] button closes the announce dialog and the system operates normally.

4. Help

4.1 Table of Contents

Select [Help]-[Contents] to view PDF files of the FPIA-3000/3000S.

4.2 Version information

Select [Help]-[Version information] to show version information of the installed FPIA-3000.



MAINTENANCE


Blank page.




Chapter 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. Testing principles ...................................................................................... 16-1

2. Image processing ...................................................................................... 16-2

3. Particle analysis ........................................................................................ 16-3

4. Statistical analysis ..................................................................................... 16-5

5. List of display items ...................................................................................16-75.1 Particle diameter parameters .............................................................. 16-75.2 Form parameters................................................................................. 16-85.3 Other test data ....................................................................................16-95.4 Statistical analysis items ..................................................................... 16-95.5 Analysis data..................................................................................... 16-10



FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION


1. Testing principles

The FPIA-3000/3000S tests particle images with the imaging flow cytometry and performs various

particle analysises.

Imaging flow cytometry means picking up flowing particles as a still image for the purpose of

image analysis. The following is an overview of how the system works.1) A sample supplied to the sample chamber is fed into a flat sheath flow cell by the sample

aspiration syringe.

2) The sample that has been fed into the flat sheath flow cell forms a highly laminar flow,

surrounded by sheath liquid.

3) A strobe light is flashed on the sample running through the flat sheath flow cell every 1/60

second. The duration of the stroboscope flash is very short, around 2µs, so that moving particles

can be captured as still images. The flow of the sample is very flat so that almost all the particles

in it can be seen in focus.

4) The particles are captured with a CCD camera and the captured images are processed in the

image-processing unit. In the image-processing unit, the edge of each particle observed is

extracted for calculation of the projected area and cut-out size of the particle.5) After testing is complete, the inside of the instrument is automatically rinsed and the sample,

together with the sheath liquid, is drained to the waste chamber.

Figure 16-1: Sample flow

1

2

4

5 3

Mixing motor

Mixing propeller

CCD camera

To the image-processing unit

Rinse chamber

Objectivelens

Waste chamber

Sample chamber

Flat sheath

flow cell

Sheath formation

syringe

Light source ofstroboscope

Sample aspirationsyringe





2. Image processing

The CCD camera for the FPIA-3000/3000S sends an analog signal of the frame image to the image-

processing unit. The image processing unit observes each particle from frame images and cut out

the particle image.

(1) Digitizing the Image

The image-processing unit converts the analog signal to an 8-bit digital signal (digitization),

and stores it in the digital memory.

(2) Smoothing processing

The image may include irregular noise as though sprinkled with tiny flakes. Processing is

executed that reduces this noise by applying a smoothing filter.

(3) Shading correction with background image

Processing is executed that uses the background image to correction shading occurring in the

background.

(4) Edge emphasis processing

The edges of the image (boundaries between light and dark areas) are sharpened so that even

low-contrast particles can be captured.

(5) Binarizing the particle image

Particle images are binarized, dividing the whole image into bright and dark portions.

Binarization is the expression of these two portions as two values, 1 and 0, respectively.

(6) Edge Tracing the Particle Image

This traces the edge of the particle image, cuts out the particle image, and finds the size and

position of the particle.

The particle image and information cut out by the image processing unit are sent to the data

processing unit, which analyses it, calculating the particle diameter and form parameters.





3. Particle analysis

This section explains the method by which image analysis is carried out on all the particle image

sent from the image processing unit and the particle diameter and form parameters calculated.

(1) Smoothing filterNoise is reduced by applying the smoothing filter. The default is processing by the median

filter. You can also select between two average filters.

• Median filter

This filter sorts the brightness values for the 3x3 area around the subject pixel and replaces

the brightness value with the median brightness value of the area.

• Average filter

This filter replaces the brightness value with the average brightness value of the 3x3 area

around the subject pixel Two operators are set for weighting the area around the center.

Option 1 operator

Option 2 operator

(2) Shading compensation with background image

Processing is executed that uses the background image to correction shading occurring in the

background.

(3) Edge emphasis filter

This executes processing that emphasizes the edge of the particle image. A Laplacian filter is

used as the edge emphasis filter. You can select from among three operators for the 3x3 area

around each pixel, the standard operator and the two optional operators.

Standard operator

Option 1 operator

1/10 1/10 1/10

1/10 2/10 1/10

1/10 1/10 1/10

1/16 2/16 1/16

2/16 4/16 2/16

1/16 2/16 1/16

0 -1/4 0

-1/4 1 -1/40 -1/4 0

-1/8 -1/8 -1/8

-1/8 1 -1/8

-1/8 -1/8 -1/8





Option 2 operator

(4) Binarizing the particle imageParticle images are binarized, dividing the whole image into bright and dark portions.

The binarization threshold is calculated with the following equation.

Binarization threshold = background image most frequent brightness × A (%) + B

A: Binarization threshold setting value A

B: Binarization threshold setting value B

The image and background areas are divided based on this threshold.

(5) Calculating parameters

The particle and form parameters of 5.1 and 5.2 are calculated from the binarized particle

image.

1/4 -2/4 1/4

-2/4 1 -2/4

1/4 -2/4 1/4





4. Statistical analysis

This section explains the statistical analysis using the particle image parameters obtained by

analyzing the particle image.

(1) Calculation of the two-dimensional frequency dataThe number of particles within each divided range of the two-dimensional scattergram in which

the circular diameters are assigned to the X axis and the circularities are assigned to the Y axis

is calculated.

Values obtained by log-conversion of the circular diameters of the tested particles are used for

the X axis, and the 0.5-200 µm range is divided into 1,024 to calculate the frequency. For

circularity, the range of 0.2-1.0 is divided into 800 parts.

(2) Frame correction

Only those particles completely within the frame area captured are counted. The probability of

a particle being included within the frame area is inversely proportional to the size of the

particle. The larger the particle, the greater the possibility of being on the edge of the framearea. Frequencies are corrected taking these probabilities into account.

(3) Calculation of distribution frequency data

Values obtained by log-conversion of the circular diameters of the tested particles are used for

the X axis. The 0.5-200 µm range is divided into 1024 to calculate the frequency. In the case of

“number”, the number of particles (f0i) whose circular diameters d1 are within the range of di

to di + 1 is calculated. In the case of “volume”, the total volume (f3i) of particles whose circular

diameters are within the range of di to di + 1 is calculated.

(4) Calculation of form frequency data

With the circularity as the Y axis, the range from 0.2 to 1.0 is divided into 1024 to calculate the

frequency.

(5) Calculation of statistical analysis items

The statistical analysis items of 5.4 are calculated from the particle frequency data and the

particle form data.

(6) Calculation of the analysis data

The analysis data of 5.5 is calculated from the 2-dimensional frequency data.





(7) Computation of 2-dimensional frequency data in Merge(LPF+HPF) mode.

In full range mode, superposition of 2-dimentional frequency data is calculated following

method.

Limit parameter and sample quantum are different between LPF mode and HPF mode.

Therefore, these frequency data cannot be simply added. Frequency conversion for differentsample quantum is calculated and frequency correction in the overlapped measuring range is

calculated.

Frequency conversion for different sample quantum

Since HPF quantum is different from LPF quantum, compensation of the frequency of HPF

measured data into frequency of LPF quantum is needed.

FH = ƒH x (VL / VH)

Frequency correction in the overlapped measuring range

When connecting up frequency data of HPF mode to LPF mode, particle size distribution

curve is not shown correctly because of the overlapping of the measured range. To solve this

problem, use this formula.

FLH = FH x {1-(δi-MIN) / (MAX-MIN)} + FL x {1-(MAX-δi) / (MAX-MIN)}

FLH : LPF/HPF frequency

FH : HPF frequency(after conversion)

FL : LPF frequency

f H : HPF frequency

VH : HPF quantum

VL : LPF quantum

MAX : upper limit of the overlapped measure range

MIN : lower limit of the overlapped measure range.





5. List of display items

5.1 Particle diameter parameters

Analysis

parameters

Symbols Units Calculation

methods

Explanation

CE Diameter D H µm 2*(S / π)1/2 The diameter of the circle having the sameprojected area as the particle image.

Max. Distance D max µm Measuredvalue

The greatest distance between two pointson the edge of the particle image.

Norm to max dist DV -max µm Measuredvalue

When the image is bounded by two straightlines parallel to the maximum length, this isthe shortest perpendicular length betweenthe two straight lines.

Length L µm Measuredvalue

The length of the longer axis when theparticle image is bounded by two pairs ofparallel lines.

Width B µm Measuredvalue

The length of the shorter axis when theparticle image is bounded by two pairs ofparallel lines.

Feret H Diameter D H-Feret

(Horizontal)µm Measured

valueThe direct linear diameter, defined as thehorizontal distance between two pairs ofparallel lines which bound the particle.

Feret V Diameter D V-Feret

(Vertical)µm Measured

valueThe direct linear diameter, defined as thevertical distance between two pairs ofparallel lines which bound the particle.

Martin H Diameter D H-Martin


valueThe length of the horizontal line whichbisects the area of the particle.

Martin V Diameter D V-Martin


valueThe length of the vertical line which bisectsthe area of the particle.

Krumbein HDiameter

D H-Krumbein


valueThe length of largest cut side when theparticle is cut horizontally.

Krumbein VDiameter

D V-Krumbein


valueThe length of largest cut side when theparticle is cut vertically.

PE Diameter D L µm C/ π The diameter of the circle having the samecircumference as the particle image.

Area(pixcels) St pixels Measuredvalue

number of pixels including outline andinterior of particle.

Perimeter C µm Measuredvalue

Length of the particle perimeter

Area S µm2 Measuredvalue

Particle area

Convex Hullperimeter

C envelope µm Measuredvalue

Peripheral length of the shape joining theprojections on the particle.

Table 16-1: Particle diameter parameters





5.2 Form parameters

Convex Hull area S envelope µm2 Measuredvalue

Area of the shape joining the projections onthe particle.

Analysis param-eters

Symbols Units Calculationmethods

Explanation

Circularity φ HL – 2×(S × π)1/2 / C The ratio between the circumferenceof a circle with the same areas as theprojected area and the peripherallength of the projected image.

Intensity Mean MI Measured value Average brightness of pixels in thearea of the particle.

Intensity SD ISD Measured value Standard deviation of brightness ofpixels in the area of the particle.

Feret Aspect ratio RD-Feret – Ratio of Feretdiameters(maximum = 1.0)

The aspect ratio of the horizontalrectangle tangent on the outside of theparticle.

Area/Box RS -Feret – S /(D H-Feret ×D V-Feret)

The ratio of the particle area to thearea of the tangent rectangle.Expresses the rectangularity of theparticle.

Aspect ratio(W/L)

RD-MajorAxis – B/L The ratio between Length and width.This means the spicular level.

Elongation EL –1-B/L

Expresses the slenerness of theparticle.

Aspect ratio(max dist)

R aspect – D v-max / D max The ratio of the largest perpendicularlength to the longest length.Expresses the spicularity of theparticle.

Solidity φ envelope – S / S envelope Level of irregularity relative to theenvelope.

Convexity R envelope – C envelope / C Level of irregularity relative to theenvelope.

HS circularity φ HS – 4x π xS/L2 The ratio of an area of the circle thatprojected area of the particle image

and peripheral length are same.

Major axis θL deg Measured value Direction where particle hasexpanded.

Table 16-2: Form parameters

Analysisparameters


Explanation

Table 16-1: Particle diameter parameters





5.3 Other test data

5.4 Statistical analysis items

Analysisparameters


Explanation

Detected (#) – Number Measured value The total number of particlesamong all those detected by the

image processing board during thetest that are above the minimumnumber of pixels.

Analyzed (#) – Number Measured value The total number of validlyanalyzed particles among thosetransferred from the imageprocessing board to the PC.

Density – × particles/ mL

Measured value Shows the particle concentration inthe sample as the number ofparticles per µl.

Analyzed volume – µL – Expresses the volume of samplingsample in the testing.

Table 16-3: Other test data

Analysisparameters

Symbols Calculation methods Explanation

Average Mean

di: Mean value of data inthe i-th channel.Fni: Mean value of data inthe i-th channel.

The total of particle parameters in therange between Ldiscrete and Udiscretedivided by the total frequency.

Mode Mode – The highest frequency value in the rangefrom Ldiscrete to Udiscrete.

SD value SD

Standard deviation in the range fromLdiscrete to Udiscrete.

CV CV% SD/Mean×100 Coefficient of variation in the range fromLdiscrete to Udiscrete.

50% value 50% – The parameter value at which thecumulative frequency in the range fromLdiscrete to Udiscrete reaches 50%.

Table 16-4: Statistical analysis items

∑(di x

u

i-1

∑fniu

i=1

∑(di - Mean)2 x fni

u

i-1

∑(fni - 1)

u

i-1

1

2





5.5 Analysis data

Upper% value Upper% – The parameter value at which thecumulative frequency in the range fromLdiscrete to Udiscrete reaches Upper%.

Lower% value Lower% – The parameter value at which thecumulative frequency in the range fromLdiscrete to Udiscrete reaches Lower%.

Analysisparameters


Selected (#) Number Same as the number ofmedium particles

When particle limits are used within thescattergram and the numbers of large,medium and small particles are definedas below, the ratios are calculated usingthe formulae on the left.

Selected (%) % No. of limited particles/No. ofanalyzed particles ×100

Large (%) % No. of large particles/(No. oflarge particles + No. ofmedium particles + No. ofsmall particles) ×100

Middle (%) % No. of medium particles/(No.of large particles + No. ofmedium particles + No. ofsmall particles) ×100

Small (%) % No. of small particles/(No. oflarge particles + No. of

medium particles + No. ofsmall particles) ×100

Table 16-5: Analysis data

Analysisparameters


Table 16-4: Statistical analysis items

Ldiscrete

Ldiscrete

Udiscrete

Udiscrete

Mediumparticles

Largeparticles

Smallparticles




APPENDIX A INSTALLATION

1. Preparation for installation...........................................................................A-11.1 Accessories...........................................................................................A-1

1.2 Place and space for installation ............................................................A-51.3 Exterior dimensions...............................................................................A-7

2. Installation ...................................................................................................A-82.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation ...........................................A-82.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S) ...........................A-152.3 Connecting the tubes ..........................................................................A-172.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables .........................A-222.5 Grounding ...........................................................................................A-252.6 Installing the analysis PC ....................................................................A-26

3. Installation of Acrobat Reader ...................................................................A-30



INSTALLATION

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 A-1

1. Preparation for installation

The FPIA-3000/3000S consists of the testing unit, data processing unit, CRT monitor, pneumatic

unit and accessories. Upon delivery, check that you have all components and that they are free of

visible damage, referring to 1.1 Accessories.

Unpacking, installation and confirmation of the initial operation are to be performed by servicepersonnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office.

1.1 Accessories

Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000 100 V-type)

Testing unit accessories

Part code Description Quantity

923-8092-8 Power cable 1

053-0495-1 Cord No. 3543 (USB 2.0 cable) 1

461-2139-2 FPIA-3000/3000S Operator’s Manual 1

844-0122-8 Dispenser set 1

043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 CD-ROM 1

442-5289-1 Silicon tube (6 × 4) 3 m

442-5338-7 Urethane tube (4 × 6) 20 m

442-5340-5 Urethane tube (9 × 6) 10 m

442-5055-4 Urethane tube (3.4 × 1.8) 1 m

442-5451-1 Teflon tube (1.5 × 2.3) 1 m

266-4461-8 Tie wrap 10

348-3954-2 Screw (M5 × 10) 1

442-3361-6 Rubber joints (No. 21) 2

462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1

462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1

462-2423-7 Pliers 1

342-3845-0 Mixing belt (MBM2-160) 1

344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No.31) 1

421-9128-5 Lens holder (No.44B) 1

421-2601-7 Objective lens 1

462-3122-1 Cubitainer cap opener 1

266-5109-1 Testing unit fuses 2



INSTALLATION

A-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

Pneumatic unit accessories

Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000 200V-type)

Testing unit accessories

Pneumatic unit accessories


266-5011-3 Pneumatic unit fuses 1


Table A-1: Accessories (100 V-type)



265-9360-0 USB 2.0 cable 1

461-2139-2 FPIA-3000/3000S Operator’s Manual 1

844-0122-8 Dispenser set 1

043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 CD-ROM 1

442-5289-1 Silicon tube (6 × 4) 3 m

442-5338-7 Urethane tube (6 × 4) 20 m

442-5340-5 Urethane tube (9 × 6) 10 m

442-5055-4 Urethane tube (3.4 × 1.8) 1 m

442-5451-1 Teflon tube (1.5 × 2.3) 1 m

266-4461-8 Tie wrap 10

348-3954-2 Screw (M5 × 10) 1

442-3361-6 Rubber joints (No. 21) 2

462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1

462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1

462-2423-7 Pliers 1

342-3845-0 Mixing belt (MBM2-160) 1

344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No. 31) 1

421-9128-5 Lens holder (No. 44B) 1

421-2601-7 Objective lens 1

462-3122-1 Cubitainer cap opener 1

266-5304-3 Testing unit fuses 2


266-5293-0 Pneumatic unit fuses 2


Table A-2: Accessories (200 V-type)



INSTALLATION


Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000S)

Testing Unit accessories

Part code No. Description Quantity

100-120V 200-240V

461-2139-2 FPIA-3000 Operator’s Manual 1 1

043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 Software CD-ROM 1 1

923-8092-8 Power cord No. 15 1 -

265-4731-5 Power cord (4622-007-0092) - 1

053-0495-1 Wiring Cord No. 3543 (USB 2.0 cable) 1 1

844-0122-8 Dispenser set (CS-61) 1 1

266-4461-8 Tie Wrap 10 10

462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1 1

462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1 1

462-2423-7 Pliers 1 1

462-3122-1 Cubitainer Cap Opener 1 1

348-3954-2 Screw (M5 x 10) 1 1

342-3845-0 Mixer belt (MBM2-160) 1 1

346-6577-2 Seal No. 27 2 2

344-7548-3 Nut No. 47 4 4

442-3809-9 Hydraulic connector No. 69 1 1

442-5442-8 Tube Teflon 4mmID x 6mmOD 10 m 10 m

442-5338-7 Tube Polyurethane 4mmID x 6mmOD 10 m 10 m

442-5055-4 Tube Polyurethane 1.8mm x 3.4mm 1 m 1 m

442-5451-1 Tube Teflon 1.5mmID x 2.3mmOD 1 m 1 m

442-8514-0 Tubing No. 114 1 1

442-8515-3 Tubing No. 115 1 1

442-8516-7 Tubing No. 116 1 1

442-8517-1 Tubing No. 117 1 1

442-8518-4 Tubing No. 118 1 1

442-8519-8 Tubing No. 119 1 1

442-8520-2 Tubing No. 120 1 1

442-8521-6 Tubing No. 121 1 1

442-8523-3 Tubing No. 123 1 1

442-8524-7 Tubing No. 124 1 1

442-8550-4 Tubing No. 125 1 1

Table A-3: Accessories



INSTALLATION


Pneumatic unit accessories (FPIA-3000S)

442-8551-8 Tubing No. 126 1 1

442-8552-1 Tubing No. 127 1 1

442-8553-5 Tubing No. 128 1 1

442-8554-9 Tubing No. 129 1 1

442-5633-5 O-ring Perfluoro-elastomerVS-1 2mmID x 5mmOD x 30mm

2 2

442-5632-1 O-ring Perfluoro-elastomerVS-1 1mmID x 3mmOD x 50mm

1 1

344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No.31) 1 1

421-9128-5 Lens holder No.44B 1 1

421-2602-1 Objective lens 1 1

053-2281-0 Filter Assembly No. 24 1 1

348-3953-9 Screw M5 x 8 2 2

266-5109-1 Fuses (ST4-3.15A-N1) 2 -

266-5304-3 Fuses (250 V 2.5 A) - 2


100-120V 200-240V

923-8092-8 Power cord No. 15 1 -

265-4731-5 Power cord (4622-007-0092) - 1

266-5011-3 Fuses (ST4-4A-N1) 2 -

266-5293-0 Fuses (250 V 3.15 A) - 2



100-120V 200-240V




INSTALLATION


1.2 Place and space for installation

The FPIA-3000/3000S is a precision instrument. Therefore, take into account the ambient

temperature, humidity, dust, vibration, water leakage, power, sunlight, peripheral space, grounding,

etc. when choosing an installation place.

WARNING • When a flammable organic solvent is used, install the instrument in afireless place. There is a potential to get fire or explosion when

evaporated gas catches fire.• When a flammable organic solvent is used, install the fire extinguisher

suitable for the organic solvent.• When the organic solvent is used, ventilate the instrument circumference

by installing a local ventilation device. There is a potential to get fire orexplosion when evaporated gas catches fire. There is also a potential toexpose to the toxic material.



INSTALLATION

A-6 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

CAUTIONFor efficient use of the device, observe the following precautions.Temperature• Avoid extreme temperatures, whether low or high.

Use the instrument in an ambient temperature of 15 to 30°C.Humidity• Avoid places subject to water splashes, e.g., the vicinity of a sink, and

highly humid places.Use the instrument under a humidity of 30 to 85%.

Dust• Avoid dusty places, e.g., the vicinity of a blackboard, windows, etc.Vibration• Install the device on a vibration-free, flat and sturdy desk or table.Water Leakage• Do not put a water-filled container on the device.

Water leaking into the device can cause malfunction.Power supply• Rated voltage: AC100 V±10%

Frequency: 50/60±1 Hz

• Do not share the same outlet with noise-generating equipment such as acentrifugal separator, ultrasonic cleaner or thermostat. Also, keep a

distance of at least 2 m from such equipment.• The instrument must be installed with a ground connection. Refer to Appendix A, 2.5 Grounding for details of the grounding method.

Sunlight• Avoid locations that are subject to direct sunlight or are below

incandescent lights.Location• The FPIA-3000 has a fan at the rear. Ensure a space of at least 20 cm

between the rear of the device and the wall so as not to interfere withventilation. To facilitate maintenance and servicing, leave space of at

least 50cm on the sides and above the top surface.Data processing PC• Confirm that the resolution of the screen is 1280 × 1024 pixels with

[Display Properties].

• Confirm that all the settings within [Power Settings] are not set toautomatically turn OFF with the [Power Options Properties].

• Please uncheck the box of the item (Animate the windows when

minimized and maxmizing) whitch is in the [Advanced]-[Performance

Options] in the System Properties of Controlpanel.• Use the time and date set in the region and language option of Control

panel by default.



INSTALLATION


1.3 Exterior dimensions

The exterior dimensions of the instrument are stated below.

Figure A-1: Exterior dimensions of the FPIA-3000/3000S

Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm)

Testing unit Approx. 900 Approx. 475 Approx. 455

Pneumatic unit Approx. 280 Approx. 355 Approx. 400

Table A-5: Exterior dimensions



INSTALLATION


2. Installation

2.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation

1. How to unfasten the pneumatic unit compressor

1 Use the screwdriver provided to undo the four fastening screws on the underside of the

pneumatic unit.

The compressor inside will be unfastened.

Figure A-2: How to unfasten the compressor



INSTALLATION


2. How to remove the fastener for transporting the testing unit

1 Lift the cover of the testing unit by hand and remove the two fastening screws.

Figure A-3: Remove the testing unit covers

2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its place.

Figure A-4: Return the drive unit to its place

Testing unit cover

Drive unit



INSTALLATION


3 Remove the two fastening screws holding the central cover.

Figure A-5: Remove the central cover fastening screws

4 Lift the central cover slightly and detach the LED cable which is connected to the back of the

cover.

Figure A-6: Detach the LED cable

5 Remove the central cover by pulling it upwards.

Figure A-7: Remove the central cover

LED cable

Central cover



INSTALLATION


6 Remove the fastening screws holding the right cover (two screws on top, two behind).

Figure A-8: Undo the right cover fastening screws

7 Remove the fastening screws holding the right cover (two on the right).

Figure A-9: Remove the right cover fastening screws



INSTALLATION


8 Remove the right cover by pulling it upwards.

Figure A-10: Remove the right cover

9 Remove the eight fastening screws holding the shade cover.

Figure A-11: Remove the shade cover fastening screws

Right cover

Shade cover



INSTALLATION


10 Remove the shade cover.

Figure A-12: Remove the shade cover11 Attach the objective lens provided to the lens holder.

Figure A-13A: Attach the objective lens

Remove the two M3 × 6 fastening screws and remove the fastening plate for shipping.

Figure A-13B: Remove the fastening plate for shipping

Shade cover

Lens holder

Objective lens

Fastening plate for shipping

Two M3 × 6 fastening screws



INSTALLATION


12 Fit the lens holder into the testing unit so that the portion with no corners is innermost.

13 Use the lens holder fastening screw to fasten the lens holder.

Figure A-14: Fasten the lens holder.

14 Remove the relay lens unit fastening screws (M5 × 60) and replace it with the screw provided

(M5 × 10).

Figure A-15: Exchange the screws

15 Return the covers to their original positions.

Lens holder fastening screw

Lens holder



INSTALLATION


2.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S)

In the FPIA-3000S, the Filter Assembly No. 24 is installed on the rear panel to filter the organic

solvent gas in the vacuum line to prevent any gas flowing into the pneumatic unit PU-17

compressor. Activated charcoal cartridge in the filter will adsorb gases.

1 Install the provided Filter Assembly No. 24 on the rear panel using the provided two screws

binding M5x8.

Figure A-16: Fixing the Filter Assembly No. 24

2 Connect the two tubes (1 each of Teflon tube and 1 each of Polyurethane tube) come from the

grommet to the fittings of the Filter Assembly No. 24.

3 Facing to the rear panel, connect the Teflon tube to the fitting located to the left of the filter andthe Polyurethane tube to the nipple located to the right side of the filter.

Figure A-17: Connecting tubes to the Filter Assembly No. 24

Filter Assembly No. 24

Screws binding M5x8

Teflon tubePolyurethane tube



INSTALLATION


4 Follow the procedures below to connect the Teflon tube to the fitting.

4-1)Slide the tube support and locking nut to the free side (to the

left in the picture) of the flange tube.

4-2)Screw in the tube support into the M6 female screw in the

fitting so that flange part of the Teflon tube will be chewed

and sealed.

4-3)After screwing in the tube support, fix the locking nut to avoid

the tube support from loosening.

Figure A-18: Connecting the flange tube

Tube support Locking nut



INSTALLATION


2.3 Connecting the tubes

Connect the pneumatic unit, the sheath fluid and drain tubes to the back of the testing unit.

1. Connecting to the pneumatic unit

1 Connect the vacuum output nipple (marked “VACUUM”) on the pneumatic unit to the vacuumsupply nipple (marked “VACUUM”) on the testing unit using the accessory polyurethane tube.

2 Connect the compressed air output nipple (marked “PRESSURE”) on the pneumatic unit to the

compressed air supply nipple (marked “PRESSURE”) on the testing unit using the accessory

polyurethane tube.

Figure A-19: Connecting the pneumatic unit

Compressed air output nipple (PRESSURE)

Vacuum output nipple (VACCUM)

Pneumatic unit

Testing unit

Polyurethane tubes

Compressed air supply

nipple

Vacuum supplynipple



INSTALLATION


2. Connecting the tubes to the reagents and waste (FPIA-3000)

1 Assemble the accessory dispenser set (connectors, tube, weight) as shown in the diagram below.

2 After assembling the dispenser set, clean it with reagent first, so that the reagent to be used

during the test is not contaminated.

3 Fill the dispenser set with PARTICLE SHEATH and fit the cap.

Figure A-20: Reagent container

Cap

Connector

Tube

Weight

PARTICLE SHEATH



INSTALLATION


4 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (6 × 4) to connect the PARTICLE SHEATH to the sheath

liquid aspiration nipple (marked “SHEATH LIQUID”) on the back of the testing unit.

Place the particle sheath container lower than the sheath aspiration nipple.

Figure A-21: Connection of the reagent container to the testing unit

5 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (6 × 4) to connect the overflow drain nipple (marked

“OVERFLOW”) on the back of the testing unit to the drain outlet (waste fluid container).

Install the waste fluid container so that it is positioned lower than the waste fluid nipple of the

testing unit.

PARTICLE SHEATH

Polyurethane tube

Sheath liquid aspiration nipple(SHEATH LIQUID)



INSTALLATION


6 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (9 × 6) to connect the waste drain nipple (marked

“WASTE”) on the back of the testing unit to the drain outlet (waste fluid container).

Install the waste fluid container so that it is positioned lower than the waste fluid nipple of the

testing unit.

Figure A-22: Connecting the waste fluid tube

Drain outlet (waste fluid container)

Polyurethane tubes

Overflow drain nipple

(OVERFLOW)

Waste drain nipple (WASTE)



INSTALLATION


3. Connecting the tubes to the reagents and waste (FPIA-3000S)

Connect the sheath fluid, waste container, overflow waste fittings located on the rear panel using

the provided Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD.

Follow the procedures below to connect to each fitting with the Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD.

1 Cut vertically the point of the Teflon tube connecting in the fitting using a sharp knife.

2 Loosen the fixing nut of the fitting and insert the tubing prepared in the step (1) fully to hit to

the inner end.

3 Tighten the fixing nut of the fitting to secure the tube.

Figure A-23: Connecting the reagent and waste tubes

WARNING• When the organic solvent is used, open the sheath and the waste

containers, and connect them to the instrument right before testing. If

the sheath and the waste containers that contain solvent are left open, itmay cause fire or explosion after gas is filled in the room. There is also apotential to expose to the toxic material.

CAUTION• Install the sheath and the waste containers in a lower position than the

waste outlet nipple of the testing unit.• When the organic solvent is used, open the sheath and the waste

containers and connect them to the instrument right before testing. If thesheath and the waste containers are left open, evapolated gas will beignited and resulted in fire or explosion. There is also a potential toexpose to the toxic material.

Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD

Fitting

Sheath inlet tube Waste outlet tubeOverflow outlet tube



INSTALLATION


2.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables

Connect the testing unit with the data processing unit and pneumatic unit using the accessory

connection cables. Then connect the accessory power cords to the testing unit and the data

processing unit.

1. Connecting the testing unit with the data processing unit

Use the accessory USB 2.0 cable to connect the main unit and the data processing unit

Figure A-24: Connecting the testing unit with the data processing unit

Connection cable Testing unit Data processing unit

USB 2.0 cable USB USB

Table A-6: Connection cables

Data Processing unit

USB connector

Testing unit

USB2.0 cable

Data communication connector



INSTALLATION


2. Connecting the testing unit with the pneumatic unit.

Connect the pneumatic unit control input cable of the pneumatic unit to the pneumatic control

output connector of the testing unit.

Figure A-25: Connecting the testing unit with the pneumatic unit

Testing unitPneumatic unit

Pneumatic unit control input connector

Pneumatic unit control

output connector



INSTALLATION


3. Connecting the power cable

Connect the accessory power cables to the testing unit, data processing unit and CRT monitor.

Figure A-26: Overall wiring diagram

CAUTIONAlways connect the grounding wires when connecting the power cables. Refer to Appendix A, 2.5 Grounding for details of the grounding method.

Data processing unit

Power cord

Testing unit

Power cord

Pneumatic unit

Power cord



INSTALLATION


2.5 Grounding

The instrument power supply cord uses a 3-prong plug. When the power supply socket is 3-prong

(with ground), simply plug it to the socket.

Figure A-27: Plugs

WARNINGMake sure to ground the instrument. Inadequate grounding could cause electricshocks.

117 VAC Spec 220 VAC Spec 240 VAC Spec



INSTALLATION


2.6 Installing the analysis PC

1. Driver installationInstall the drivers on the analysis PC to enable it to recognize this instrument.

1 Connect this device and the analysis PC with the USB cable and switch ON the power for the

main unit. (You can not install the driver until you connect the USB and switch ON the main

unit power.)

2 Turn on the analysis PC.

3 Insert the accessory disk labeled “FPIA-3000 CD-ROM” in the CD drive of the PC.

4 After a short while, the new hardware is detected, so a dialog asking you to install the driver is

displayed.

5 Here, press the [Next] button to display the driver installation folder as necessary, select“driver” on the CD drive as the copy source and install.

6 Hardware is detected three times. Each time, install the driver with the above procedure.

7 During this process, a dialog like that in the figure below is displayed once. Here, press the

[Continue Anyway] button.

Figure A-28: [Hardware Installation] dialog

8 When driver software has been installed three times, the driver installation is complete.

9 Next, check that the driver software is installed correctly.When you select [Start] – [Control panel] – [System] – [Hardware] – [Device

manager ], a device manager dialog like that in Figure A-29 is displayed.

Check that the three drivers below are displayed in the tree display displayed there.

SYSMEX-IPboard

USB High Speed Serial Converter

USB Serial Port(COM3)

NOTE: • FPIA-3000S uses the same software as the FPIA-3000. The softwareautomatically recognizes the testing unit; either FPIA-3000S or FPIA-3000.



INSTALLATION


Figure A-29: [Device Manager ] dialog



INSTALLATION


2. Installation of the FPIA-3000 application

Install the FPIA-3000 on the analysis PC.

1 Double click on [FPIA-3000(ENG).exe] on the CD.


Figure A-30: Welcome to the FPIA-3000 Setup Wizard dialog

2 Click on the [Next] button.


Figure A-31: Select installation folder

NOTE: Depending on the version of Windows, a dialog prompting you to update the system fileis displayed after double-clicking on [FPIA-3000(ENG).exe]. Click on the [OK] button.The system file is automatically updated and the computer restarts. Run the installationagain from step 1.



INSTALLATION




Figure A-32: Installation Confirmation dialog



Figure A-33: Installation Complete dialog

5 Click on the [Close] button.

This completes FPIA-3000 installation.



INSTALLATION


3. Installation of Acrobat Reader

To view [HELP] - [Content] in the FPIA-3000, installed Adobe's Acrobat Reader is needed. Run

SetUp(JPN).exe (the location of which is mentioned after) in the FPIA-3000 software CD-ROM to

install Acrobat Reader.

(This version of the software must be 7 or later.)

D:\adobe\SetUp(ENG).exe

( "D:" can vary depending on your PC's configuration. Select the directory where you set the FPIA-

3000 software CD-ROM.)




APPENDIX B SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF

THE FPIA-3000/3000S

1. Specifications ..............................................................................................B-1



SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 B-1

1. Specifications

Name

Flow-type histogram analyzer FPIA-3000

PurposeTo test and analyze the sizes and shapes of various particles and cells in the fields of medical

chemistry, physicochemistry and general industry by image processing

Test Conditions

1) Subjects

(FPIA-3000)

E.g. Toner, silica, carbon, ceramics, grinding agents, powder paints, battery materials, metal

powders, pharmaceutical materials etc.

(FPIA-3000S)

Solvents which are listed in FPIA-3000S organic solvent list in APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR

SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS.

2) Dispersant

Water based: PARTICLE SHEATH

Alcohol based: Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)

*Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath liquid or

dispersant is not guaranteed.

3) Test range

Particle-diameter test range

When HPF is independently tested: 1.5–40 µm

When LPF is independently tested: 8.0–160 µm

Circularity measurement range: 0.200–1.000

4) Reference value for appropriate particle density

When HPF is independently tested: 36,000 particles/µL when approximately 1-6 µm of

particles are measured.

When LPF is independently tested: 36,000 particles/µL when approximately 8 µm of

particles are measured.

* The appropriate particle density varies with the particle diameters captured.

5) Required sample volume 5mL

6) Processing performance

Measurement mode Measurement time Throughput

HPF test mode Approx. 170 s approx. 21 samples/hr.

LPF test mode Approx. 170 s approx. 21 samples/hr.

Table B-1: Throughput




B-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

Test Items and display items

1) Test Items

(Particle diameter items)CE Diameter

Max. Distance

Norm to max dist

Length

Width

Feret H Diameter (Horizontal)

Feret V Diameter (Vertical)

Martin H Diameter (Horizontal)

Martin V Diameter (Vertical)

Krumbein H Diameter (Horizontal)

Krumbein V Diameter (Vertical)PE Diameter

Area(pixels)

Perimeter

Area

Convex Hull perimeter

Convex Hull area

(Particle Shape items)

Circularity

Intensity Mean

Intensity SD

Feret Aspect ratioArea/Box

Aspect ratio (W/L)

Elongation

Aspect Ratio (max dist)

Convexity

Solidity

HS Circularity

Major axis

(Statistical analysis items)

Mean

ModeSD

CV

50%

Lower%

Upper%

NOTE: Only the surface area circular diameter and circularity analysis results when particlesheath liquid is used as the sheath liquid and dispersal agent are assured.





(Analysis data)

Selected (#)

Selected (%)

Large (%)

Middle (%)

Small (%)

(Other items)

Detected (#)

Analyzed (#)

Density

Analyed volume

2) Display Items

Particle imageHistograms of measured itemsScattergrams of measured itemsCumulative distribution of measured itemsList of stored dataFrequency tables for measurement itemsGraph(Overlay-View)Graph(Trend-View) (analysis parameters, scattergrams)Meta dataSample Data DateSample NumberSample NameSample Group NameMeasurer name




B-4 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

Reagents and their consumption

At startup

Testing

At shutdown

At sheath liquid replacement

Exterior dimensions and weights

Reagent Consumption

PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) approx. 90 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) approx. 70 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for auto focus) approx. 170 mL

Reagent Consumption

PARTICLE SHEATH (For sheath + rinse) Approx. 130 mL/sample

Reagent Consumption

PARTICLE SHEATH Approx. 90 mL

Reagent Consumption

Replaced reagent (PARTICLE SHEATH or organic solvent) Approx. 710 mL

Table B-2: Reagents and their consumption

Component Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)

Testing unit Approx. 900 Approx. 455 Approx. 475 Approx. 59.5

Pneumatic unit Approx. 280 Approx. 400 Approx. 355 Approx. 17

Table B-3: Dimensions of the components




Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 B-5

Operating Environment

Ambient temperature: 15–30°C

Relative humidity: 30–85%

Installation conditions: Avoid direct sunlight, dust, vibration, acidity and condensation.

Power supplyRated voltage: AC100 V±10%

Frequency: 50/60±1 Hz

Power supply/power consumption

Testing unit

Pneumatic unit

Heat Compensation Required: Approximately 1,979 BTU/h (approximately 499 kcal/h)

Protection typeClassification by method of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment

Voltage specification Rated voltage Power consumption

50 Hz 60 Hz

100 V-type200 V-type

100–117 V±10%220–240 V±10%

300 VA max.

Voltage specification Rated voltage Power consumption

50 Hz 60 Hz

100 V-type 100–117 V±10% 230 VA max. 280 VA max.

200 V-type 220–240 V±10% 220 VA max. 250 VA max.

Table B-4: Power consumption of the components





Precision

1) Accuracy

Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples below

are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values below.

Item Analysis

mode

Sample Particle

diameter(µm)

Sample

density (×103

particles/mL)

Standard

values:

Averagediameter

HPE Duke 4016A 1.6 Approx. 1,000 ±3%

HPE Duke 4210A 10 Approx. 100 ±3%


LPE Duke 4240A 40 Approx. 50 ±3%

Averagecircularity

HPE By SysmexStandard particlesfor FPIA(FSH-100A)

2 Approx. 20,000 ±0.5%

LPE By SysmexStandard particlesfor FPIA(FSL-100A)

16 Approx. 1,000 ±0.5%

Particledensity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±5%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±5%

Table B-5: Accuracy





2) Reproducibility (diameter)

Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples

below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values below.

Item Analysismode

Sample Particlediameter(µm)

Sample

density (×103

particles/mL)

Standardvalues:

Averagediameter

HPE Duke 4016A 1.6 Approx. 1,000 ±1%




10%diameter

HPE Duke 4016A 1.6 Approx. 1,000 ±1%




90%diameter

HPE Duke 4016A 1.6 Approx. 1,000 ±1%




Averagecircularity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±0.3%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±0.3%

Particledensity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±5%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±5%

Table B-6: Reproducibility





3) Carryover

Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples below

are measured will be within the range of rated values below.

2 µmPSL, approx. 170,000 ×103 pcs/mL (5200A/ Duke)

Standard values: Carryover rate: 0.3% max.

Recommended specifications for data processing PC

1) OS Windows XP professional SP1 or later

2) CPU Intel Pentium4 3.0 GHz or faster / Hyper Threading Technology: ON

3) Memory 1.0 GB or greater

4) Hard disk drive 100 GB or greater5) Storage One 3.5-inch floppy disk drive

DVD ± R/RW (or DVD-RAM) drive ×1

6) Input/output ports At least four USB 2.0 ports

RS232C

Ethernet 10/100BASE-T ×1 port

7) Monitor 1280×1024 resolution or greater (at least 17-inch LCD monitor

recommended)

NOTE: • The diameters of latex particles 4016A, 4210A and 4240A used in this test areguaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (NationalInstitute of Standards and Technology) standards.

• Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed,produced and managed by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement

of average circularity and particle density by the FPIA-3000.




APPENDIX C TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS

1. Table of system settings............................................................................. C-1

2. Table of SOP settings ................................................................................ C-3



TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 C-1

1. Table of system settings

Groups Type Item Default values Unit

System ID Number Instrument Type FPIA-3000

Print Auto Print Not Apply

Record operation Auto Delete Not Apply

Sample Number Sample number increment Apply

Display Toolbar Valid

Unit Unit of density / µl

Testing unit Pneumatic UnitTimer

ON/OFF OFF

Timeout Duration 5 minutes

Detector Targettemperature

Defector Target temperature 25.0 °C

Detector TempCorrection

Detector Temp Correction Apply

Transmission Serial port Port No Port 1Baud rate 9600 bps

Character Size 8

Parity NONE

Stop Bit 1

Class ClassB

Delay time 0 Sec.

LAN port IP Address 192

IP Address 168

IP Address 0

IP Address 0

Port No. 4000

Delay time Sec.

Transmissionblock

Transmit particle diameter table No

Transmit form table No

Transmit scattergram No

Transmit extended analysis No

Automatictransmission

Auto transmission (serial) No

Auto transmission (LAN) No

Select Transmission Data SelectAll




C-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

Supplementary explanation

1) System ID number - Instrument Type:

The FPIA-3000 allows its user to set instrument type.

Input an ID up to 10 alphanumerics long.

Do not use "/" or "\" character.

2) System - Record operation - Automatic deletion“Use/Do not use”

The maximum number of samples stored into memory is 1000. You can set whether or not the

oldest sample data is automatically erased when there are more than 1000 samples for memory.

The default is set to “Do not use”.

3) System - Sample number - Sample number increment

“Use/Do not use”

You can set whether or not the sample number on the measurement and analysis conditions

screen is incremented automatically. The default is set to “Use”.

4) Sensor target temperature

This sets the target temperature for the sensor.

The default is a target temperature range of 25.0°C. The target temperature can be set in therange from 15.0°C to 30.0°C.

Since the target temperature is adjusted automatically when detection unit room temperature

correct is set to “Use”, the target temperature setting is only in effect when “Do not use” is set.

5) Detection unit room temperature correction

“Use/Do not use”

You can set whether or not to automatically adjust the temperature of the detection unit.

The default is set to “Use”.

6) System-Display-Toolbar

“[Valid / Invalid]”

Menu icons of the FPIA-3000 will be displayed if you select [Valid] or will not be displayed if

you select [Invalid].

7) System - Unit - Unit of density

Unit of concentration will be set /UL if you select "/UL" or /ML if "ML".

CAUTIONAttention must be paid to the following when detection unit room temperaturecorrection is set to “No”.(1) If the difference between the ambient temperature (room temperature) and the

target temperature is large, the detection unit temperature may not reach theset target temperature. Change the ambient temperature or the targettemperature.(Example: Ambient temperature 30.0°C, target temperature 15.0°C)

(2) Depending on the target temperature, it may take over an hour for thetemperature within the detection unit to stabilize.

Open the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog screen and check the devicestatus.

(3) The measurement results are outside the assured range.





2. Table of SOP settings

Group Item Units

Testing Parameters Magnification

Auto Merge

Merge(LPF+HPF)

By time/By count

Count Limit Particles

Repeat Times Times

SOP Update Date

Sheath liquid Parameters Sheath liquid ID

Testing Unit Status RPM Target rpm

RPM Range rpm

Particle Parameters BG compensation

Binarization method

Smoothing filter

Edge emphasis filter

Coef. A for Binarizing %

Coef. B for Binarizing

Diameter correction

Statistical Parameters Dilution ratio

Smoothing

Miles - Lantuejoul Method

Density correction

Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %

Size-Dsp Axis Max um

Size- Dsp Axis Min um

Shape Parameter

Shape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Shape-Dsp Axis Min





IP board settings Minimum pixel

Median filter

Laplacian filter

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “a%” %

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “b”

Extended Analysis1 Analysis type

Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %


Size- Dsp Axis Min umShape Parameter

Shape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Shape-Dsp Axis Min

Polygon limit point


Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %



Shape ParameterShape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Group Item Units





Shape-Dsp Axis Min

Polygon limit point


Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %



Shape Parameter

Shape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper LimitShape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Shape-Dsp Axis Min

Polygon limit point


Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %



Shape Parameter

Shape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower LimitShape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Shape-Dsp Axis Min

Polygon limit point

Group Item Units

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Supplementary explanation:

1. Testing Parameters

1) Magnification

You can select from three modes: HPF, LPF, and LPF -> HPF.2) AutoMerge

If you select [Apply] and set repeat count up as more than 2 in Stop by Time, all measured

data will be merged automatically and new merged records will be generated after all repeat

measurement has been finished.


Size Parameter

Size-Dsp Axis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size lower % %



Shape Parameter

Shape Dsp Axis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %Shape Lower % %

Shape-Dsp Axis Max

Shape-Dsp Axis Min

Polygon limit point

User difinition Definition 1

Definition 2

Definition 3

Definition 4

Definition 5

Definition 6

Definition 7

Definition 8

Definition 9

Definition 10

Group Item Units





3) Merge(LPF+HPF)

If you select [Analyze], records of full range will be generated after LPF/HPF measure if

you measured in full range mode. For details refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION .

4) By time/By count

You can select quantity count or total count.5) Count Limit

When you select total count mode, you can set the number for reaching the target.


6) Repeat Times

When you select quantity count mode, you can set the number of measurement repetitions.

Up to 20 can be set.

7) SOP Update date

You can view day when SOP configuration information is updated (cannot be edited here.)

2. Sheath liquid Parameters

1) Sheath liquid ID

You can select the sheath liquid used for measurement.

You can select from particle sheath, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and ethylene glycol.

3. Testing Unit Status

1) RPM Target

You can set the target value for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.

You can set from 50 to 750 rpm.

2) RPM Range

You can set the rpm monitoring range for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.

If you input 100 rpm, the rotation rate is monitored ±100 rpm of the mixer rpm target value.

4. Particle Parameters

1) BG compensation

“Apply/Not Apply”

You can set whether or not to use background compensation in the particle analysis

processing. The default is set to “Apply”.

2) Smoothing filter

“Median, Other 1, Other 2, Don't”

You can select a smoothing filter for eliminating noise.

The default is set to “Median”.

3) Edge emphasis filter“2D filter, Other 1, Other 2, Don't”

You can select the edge emphasis processing filter.

The default is set to “2D filter”.

4) Binarization threshold setting

You can set the threshold for binarization processing.

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “A%” (Default = 85)

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “B” (Default = 0)





5) Diameter correction


You can select whether or not to correct the calculated particle diameter parameters and

circularity with the calibration results. The default is set to “Apply”.

5. Statistical Parameters

1) Dilution ratioWhen the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is displayed converted to the pre-dilution

value.

You can input a real number up to a maximum of 99,999.

2) Smoothing


You can select whether or not to smooth the frequency distribution display.

The default is set to “Not Apply”.

3) Miles - Lantuejoul Method


You can select whether or not to use frame correction.The default is set to “Apply”.

4) Density correction


You can select whether or not to correct the particle concentrations with the calibration

results.

The default is set to “Apply”.

5) Size Parameter

You can select the particle form.

6) Size-Dsp Axis Div (Number of particle display axis divisions)

You can set and change the number of divisions for the X-axis direction particle distributiondisplay axis.

You can set from 1 to 512.

7) Size Upper Limit (Particle diameter upper value)

You can set the upper value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.

8) Size Lower Limit (Particle diameter lower value)

You can set the lower value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.

9) Size Upper% (Particle diameter upper % value)

You can set the upper % value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.

10)Size Lower% (Particle diameter lower % value)

You can set the lower % value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.

11)Size-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on particle display axis)

You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.

12)Size-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on particle display axis)

You can set the minimum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.

13)Shape Parameter

You can select the particle shape.





14)Shape-Dsp Axis Div (Number of shape display axis divisions)

You can set the number of divisions for the Y-axis direction particle shape display axis.


15)Shape Upper Limit (Shape upper value)

You can set the upper value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

16)Shape Lower Limit (Shape lower value)You can set the lower value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

17)Shape Upper% (Shape upper % value)

You can set the upper % value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

18)Shape Lower% (Shape lower % value)

You can set the lower % value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

19)Shape-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on form display axis)

You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle shape

distribution.

20)Shape-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on form display axis)

You can set the maximum value for displaying the Y-axis direction particle shapedistribution.

6. Image processing board settings

You can set the parameters for the image processing board mounted in the main unit.

1) Minimum pixel

You can set the effective minimum number of pixels captured.

5/12/20/40/60/90/145/215/300/395/510/645/830/950/1050/1250 can be selected.

2) Median filter

You can set whether or not to use the median filter for smoothing processing.

Apply or Not Apply can be selected.

3) Laplacian filter

You can set whether or not to use a Laplacian filter for edge emphasis processing.


4) Binarization threshold setting coefficient

You can set the threshold for binarize the captured image.

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “a%” (Default = 90)

Binarization threshold setting coefficient “b” (Default = 0)

7. Enhancing analysis 1-5

These items are valid for enhancing analyses that can be used on the [Analysis results] screen.

This section explains enhancing analysis 1 as typical.

1) Analysis type

“Rectangular analysis/Polygonal analysis”

You can select either rectangular analysis, which limits through normal discrimination

operations, or polygonal analysis, which limits by specifying points on the scattergram.

2) Size Parameter






3) Size-Dsp Axis Div (Number of particle display axis divisions)

You can set and change the number of divisions for the X-axis direction particle distribution

display axis.


4) Size Upper Limit (Particle diameter upper value)

You can set the upper value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.5) Size Lower Limit (Particle diameter lower value)


6) Size Upper% (Particle diameter upper % value)


7) Size Lower% (Particle diameter lower % value)


8) Size-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on particle display axis)


9) Size-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on particle display axis)

You can set the minimum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.

10)Shape Parameter


11)Shape-Dsp Axis Div (Number of shape display axis divisions)



12)Shape Upper Limit (Shape upper value)


13)Shape Lower Limit (Shape lower value)

You can set the lower value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

14)Shape Upper% (Shape upper % value)


15)Shape Lower% (Shape lower % value)


16)Shape-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on form display axis)

You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle shape

distribution.

17)Shape-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on form display axis)

You can set the maximum value for displaying the Y-axis direction particle shape

distribution.18)Polygon limit points

These show the polygonal limit points on the scattergram.

This is only valid when the analysis type is polygonal.

The limit points can only be changed on the [Analysis Results] screen.





8. User definition items

The user can mount user definitions by creating their own calculation equations using the

statistical results.

User defined equations 1-10 can be set.

The results of these calculations are stored into the results records.

Below is the method for creating a user-defined equation.First, move the mouse to the value column for user-defined equation 1-10, then left click to

display the figure below.

Input the item name, calculation equation, and unit, then press the [Setting] button.

Figure C-1: [Setting Extended Analysis items] dialog

The creation method is shown below.

1) Item Name input

You can input the defined equation name. You can input alphanumerics.

2) Equation input

For variables, you can use the following two methods. (For the input characters, lowercase

and uppercase are not distinguished.)





Variables 1:

Variables that take the form (scatter).axis.(parameter)

Scatter: standard item and five expansion analysis items

SS1, ES1, ES2, ES3, ES4, ES5

Meanings: SSI (standard) ES-ES5 (expansion analysis)

Axes: X, YParameters: 7 analysis items

MEAN, MODE, P50, LOWER, UPPER, SD, CV

Meanings: MEAN (average), MODE (mode value), P50 (50% value)

LOWER (lower value), UPPER (upper value), SD (standard

deviation), CV (coefficient of variation)

(Concrete examples)

SS1.X.LOWER: On the standard analysis screen scattergram, of the items selected on the

X axis, this takes the Lower value data as the variable.

Variables 2:

Variables that take the form (scatter).A.(analysis results)

The scattergram is the same as above.

Analysis results: The results analyzed

D, SP, MP, LP, AP, TC, VC, SC

Meaning: D (Density: Particle density),

SP (SmallParticle: Small particle ratio),

MP (MiddleParticle: Middle particle ratio),

LP (LargeParticle: Large particle ratio),

AP (AreaParticle: Particle limit ratio),

TC (TotalCounts: Particle detection count),

VC (ValidCounts: Valid analysis count),SC (SelectedParticle: Selected particle count),

(Concrete examples)

ES1.A.D: Takes the density of the expansion analysis rectangular analysis 1 screen as the

variable.

The functions that can be used are as follows.

Functions: LOG(), LOG10(), EXP(), EXP10(), SQRT()

3) Input the unit.

Input the unit in alphanumerics.

4) User-defined item examples

These are examples of user-defined items.

Example 1: DATA1=LOG(ES2.A.D)

Example 2: DATA2=ES1.A.AP/ES2.AP




APPENDIX D OUTPUT FORMAT

1. Summary .................................................................................................... D-1

2. Serial communications ............................................................................... D-12.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-12.2 Communication Format........................................................................ D-12.3 Signal Level.......................................................................................... D-22.4 Protocols used in communication with the host ................................... D-22.5 Class A communications...................................................................... D-22.6 Class B communications...................................................................... D-32.7 Processing of communication errors with the host............................... D-42.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side....................................................... D-4

3. Ethernet communications........................................................................... D-53.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-53.2 Software ............................................................................................... D-53.3 Text format ........................................................................................... D-63.4 Transmission format selection ............................................................. D-6

4. Data format................................................................................................. D-74.1 Test results (limited data)..................................................................... D-74.2 Histogram data..................................................................................... D-94.3 Scattergram data................................................................................ D-114.4 Extend data ........................................................................................ D-13

5. Particle form ............................................................................................. D-19

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



OUTPUT FORMAT

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 D-1

1. Summary

This section describes the interface for communications between the data processing unit and the

host computer, enabling serial communications and Ethernet communications.

2. Serial communications

2.1 Hardware

1) Connectors

The connector is a male 9-pin D-SUB connector on the instrument.

The cable connector is a female 9-pin D-SUB connector.

Fixing screws for this connector have an inch thread pitch.

2) Device input/output signals

2.2 Communication Format

Data communication is full duplex, synchronous.

Pin number Signal name Signal direction

1

2 Data received (R×D) IN

3 Data sent (T×D) OUT

4 Data terminal ready (DTR) OUT

5 Signal ground (SG)

6 Data set ready (DSR) IN

7 Send request (RTS) OUT

8 Send OK (CTS) IN9

Settings Setting types

Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,200/19,200/28,800/38,400

Data length 7 bits/8 bits

Stop Bit 1 bit/2 bitParity Odd/even/none

Protocol Class A/Class B

Interval 0 s to 15 s



OUTPUT FORMAT

D-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

2.3 Signal Level

As follows, compliant with JIS C67361.

2.4 Protocols used in communication with the host

The FPIA-3000 supports the following 2 protocols for data communications with the host:

1) Class A

2) Class B

2.5 Class A communications

1) Text format

Text is sent in a single block or multiple blocks, depending on the length.

Each text block begins with STX and ends with ETX.

2) Communications sequences

The class A communications sequence is shown below.

You can select the minimum interval (T) transmission for transmissions between blocks

communicating from the FPIA-3000 from 0–15 seconds.

Level Data signal Control signal

At least +3 V Logical ‘0’ start bit ON

-3 V max. Logical ‘1’ stop bit OFF

Transmission of only a single block

STX

ETX

Text(Text length notdefined)

S

TX

E

TX

Text

(Text length notdefined)

S

TX

E

TX

Text


S

TX

E

TX

Text


Block 1

Transmission of multiple blocks

Block NBlock 2

Block 1 Block 2

T



OUTPUT FORMAT


2.6 Class B communications

This is the communications format in which responses from the host computer to data sent by the

FPIA-3000 are received.

1) Text format




The class B communications sequence is shown below.

Any length of time from 0 to 15 seconds can be chosen for the minimum transmission interval (T)

between when the FPIA-3000 sends data and receives ACK from the host and when it sends the

next data block.

3) Block resend

If the response code is NAK, the preceding block is resent.

However, it resends up to four times, and after that cancels transmission if it receives another NAK.

ACK and NAK are not bracketed by STX and ETX.

4) Communication interruption

To interrupt transmission from the host side, EOT is sent after a block is finished.

When the FPIA-3000 receives EOT as a response code, it cancels subsequent transmission of text.

Transmission of only a single block

STX

ETX


ST

X

ET

X

Text(Text length not

defined)

ST

X

ET

X


defined)

ST

X

ET

X


defined)

Block 1


Block NBlock 2

Block 1 Block 2

T

Block N

ACK

TACK



OUTPUT FORMAT


2.7 Processing of communication errors with the host

The FPIA-3000 monitors and processes the following errors:

1. Transmission error when receiving a response code

2. Reception of a break code

3. CTS not active when sending

4. DSR not active when sending

5. Monitoring of response codes (Class B)

6. Monitoring of resend repetitions when a resend request is received.

7. Timeout when receiving a response (Class B)

1) Transmission error when receiving a response code

If a parity error, overrun error or a frame error has occurred when receiving a response code, the

subsequent transmission of data is canceled.

2) Reception of a break code

Ignored3) CTS not active when sending

When sending data, if CTS is not active for five seconds or more, transmission is canceled.

4) DSR not active when sending

When sending data, if DSR is not active for one second or more, transmission is canceled.

5) Monitoring of response codes (Class B)

When the response code is other than ACK or NAK, the subsequent transmission of blocks is

canceled.

6) Monitoring of resend repetitions when a resend request is received.

If, after the third retransmission (i.e., four transmissions in all), NAK was returned, the subsequent

transmission of blocks is canceled.

7) Timeout when receiving a response (Class B)

If, after sending data, neither ACK or NAK is sent within 15 seconds, data transmission is canceled.

2.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side

The following errors must be monitored to maintain the reliability of data transmission.

1) Receive data timeout

If the text end code, such as ETX, is not received within a certain period.

2) Transmission errorIf a parity error or similar problem occurs.



OUTPUT FORMAT


3. Ethernet communications

3.1 Hardware

The physical layer and datalink layer are compliant with IEEE802.3.

Connectors

Use Ethernet twisted pair cables (UTP cable category 5) for connections.

Input/Output Signals

3.2 Software

1) Network layer/transport layer

The TCP/IP protocol is used.

2) Session layer

The connection uses the host as the server and the instrument as the client, and is made on startup.

If the connection fails, it is deemed a connection error and no attempts to reconnect are made.

3) Presentation layer

Transmitted data is ASCII (8 bit).

The FPIA-3000 supports Class A for data communications with the host.

Pin number Signal name Signal direction

1 TD+ OUT

2 TD- OUT

3 RD+ IN

4 NC –5 NC –

6 RD- IN

7 NC –

8 NC –



OUTPUT FORMAT


3.3 Text format

1) Text format




The class A communications sequence is shown below.

You can select the minimum interval (T) transmission for transmissions between blocks

communicating from the FPIA-3000 from 0–15 seconds.

3.4 Transmission format selection

You can select whether or not to use the following transmission formats.

The test results are always sent.

No. Transmission item Number of blocks Transmission setting

1 Test data Test results (limited data) 1-block transfer Apply

2 Frequency data X-axis frequency data 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply

Y-axis frequency data 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply

3 Scattergram data 2-D frequency data8 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply

4 Extended Analysisdata

Test results(Extend data) 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply

Transmission of only a single blockSTX

ETX


STX

ETX


STX

ETX


STX

ETX


Block 1


Block NBlock 2

Block 1 Block 2

T



OUTPUT FORMAT


225 Middle (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

231 Large (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

237 Detected (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

243 Size Parameter 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces

245 Particle value (average) 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

252 Mode value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

259 Particle value (SD) 7 "**.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

266 Particle value (CV) 7 "**.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

273 Lower value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

280 50% value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

287 Upper value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

294 Shape Parameter 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces

296 Particle value (average) 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space

padding







345 User analysis item 1 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

No. Item Char. Sample Notes



OUTPUT FORMAT

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 D-9

When data overflow occurs, the corresponding number of asterisks (*****) is transmitted.

4.2 Histogram data

X-axis frequency data (E.g.: Equivalent circle diameter)










415 ETX 1

(a) 0: No error 1: Error (not relevant to the reliability of data)2: Error (relevant to the reliability of data)


1 STX 1

2 Text segment 1 "D"

3 Block division 1 "H"

4 Block No. 2 "01"

6 Number of blocks 2 "01"

8 Record No. 10 Right-justified; padded with spaces

18 Particle type 2 "01"

20 Particle axis attribute (log/ linear)

1

21 Interval width 3 "226"




OUTPUT FORMAT

D-10 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006


Y-axis frequency data (E.g.: Circularity)


24 Axis maximum value 5 "400" Right-justified; padded with spaces

29 Axis minimum value 5 "0.6" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 1 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 2 5 "*****"

|



1168 ETX 1


1 STX 1


3 Block division 1 "H"

4 Block No. 2 "01"



18 Particle type 2 "01"

20 Par ticle axis attribute (log/ linear)

1

21 Interval width 3 "80" Right-justified; padded with spaces

24 Axis maximum value 5 "1" Right-justified; padded with spaces

29 Axis minimum value 5 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 1 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces


|Frequency data 226 5 "*****"


438 ETX 1




OUTPUT FORMAT


4.3 Scattergram data

Block 1


1 STX 1


3 Block division 1 "S"

4 Block No. 2 "01"



18 Particle diameter from (Yaxis)

2 "01"

20 Particle axis attribute (log/

linear)

1 "02" "1": Linear "2": Log

21 Particle interval width 3 "226" Right-justified; padded with spaces

24 Max. value on particlediameter axis

5 "200" Right-justified; padded with spaces

29 Min. value on particle axis 5 "0.5" Right-justified; padded with spaces

34 Particle type (Y axis) 2 "04"

36 Particle axis attribute (Yaxis)

1 "1" "1": Linear "2": Log

37 Particle interval width (Y

axis)


40 Particle axis maximumvalue (Y axis)


45 Particle axis minimumvalue (Y axis)

3 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 1 (X axis) 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 2 (X axis) 5 "*****"

|

Frequency data 227 (X

axis)

5 "*****"

1179 ETX 1



OUTPUT FORMAT


Block 81



1 STX 1


3 Block division 1 "S"

4 Block No. 2 "81"



18 Particle diameter from (Yaxis)

2 "01"

20 Par ticle axis attribute (log/ linear)

1 "1": Linear "2": Log

21 Particle interval width 3 "226" Right-justified; padded with spaces

24 Max. value on particlediameter axis


29 Min. value on particle axis 5 "0.5" Right-justified; padded with spaces

34 Particle type (Y axis) 2 "04"

36 Particle axis attribute (Yaxis)

1 "1" "1": Linear "2": Log

37 Particle interval width (Yaxis)


40 Particle axis maximum

value (Y axis)


45 Particle axis minimumvalue (Y axis)

3 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 1 (X axis) 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces

Frequency data 2 (X axis) 5 "*****"

|

Frequency data 227 (Xaxis)

5 "*****"

1179 ETX 1



OUTPUT FORMAT


4.4 Extend data


1 STX 1


3 Block division 1 "K"

4 Block No. 2 "01"



18 Extend code 1 "1"

19 Detected (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces

25 Analyzed (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces

31 Selected (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces

37 Density 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces

43 Small (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

49 Middle (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

55 Large (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

61 Selected (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ spacepadding

67 Size Parameter (X axis) 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces








118 Shape Parameter (Y axis) 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces



OUTPUT FORMAT















200 Middle (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space

padding












OUTPUT FORMAT



























OUTPUT FORMAT














594 Particle value (CV) 7 "**.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space

padding













OUTPUT FORMAT















724 Particle value (average) 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space

padding







773 ETX

(a) If Polygon range limit analysis is selected at Extended Analysis, these datas become “∗∗∗∗∗∗”




OUTPUT FORMAT


5. Particle form

Particle type No. Name

1 CE Diameter (number base)

2 CE Diameter (area base)3 CE Diameter (volume base)

4 Circularity

5 Max. Distance

6 Norm to max dist

7 Length

8 Width

9 Feret H Diameter (Horizontal)

10 Feret V Diameter (Vertical)

11 Martin H Diameter (Horizontal)

12 Martin V Diameter (Vertical)

13 Krumbein H Diameter (Horizontal)

14 Krumbein V Diameter (Vertical)

15 PE Diameter

16 Area (pixels)

17 Perimeter

18 Area

19 Convex Hull perimeter

20 Convex Hull area

21 Intensity Mean

22 Intensity SD

23 Feret Aspect ratio

24 Area/Box

25 Aspect Ratio (W/L)

26 Elongation

27 Aspect Ratio (max dist)

28 Convexity

29 Solidity

30 HS Circularity

31 Major axis



OUTPUT FORMAT


Blank page.




APPENDIX E GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST

OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC

SOLVENTS

1. Gas sensor level setting values...................................................................E-1

2. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents.........................................E-2



GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 E-1

1. Gas sensor level setting values

Since the gas sensor sensitivity is different on each organic solvent, set the gas sensor sensitivity

according to the organic solvent to be used. Consult with your Sysmex service representative for

the sensor level setting value that is not listed in the Table E-1.

No. Name of the Organic Solvent Gas Sensor Level Setting Values

1 n-hexane LEVEL 3

2 cyclohexane LEVEL 3

3 n-heptane LEVEL 4

4 acetone LEVEL 4

5 isopropyl alcohol LEVEL 4

6 ethanol LEVEL 4

7 Ethylene glycol LEVEL 4

8 xylene LEVEL 4

9 o- xylene LEVEL 4

10 m- xylene LEVEL 4

11 p- xylene LEVEL 4

12 chloroform LEVEL 4

13 diethylene glycol LEVEL 4

14 cyclohexanone LEVEL 4

15 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) LEVEL 4

16 N,N-dimethyl formamide (DMF) LEVEL 4

17 decane LEVEL 4

18 tetrahydrofuran LEVEL 419 1,1,1-trichloro ethane LEVEL 4

20 1,1,2-trichloro ethane LEVEL 4

21 toluene LEVEL 4

22 propylene glycol LEVEL 4

23 benzene (benzol) LEVEL 4

24 Polyethylene glycol LEVEL 4

25 methanol LEVEL 4

26 Methyl ethyl ketone LEVEL 4

27 Ethyl acetate LEVEL 4

28 n-butyl acetate LEVEL 4

29 s-butyl acetate LEVEL 4

30 methyl acetate LEVEL 4

31 kerosene LEVEL 4

32 octane LEVEL 4

33 nonane LEVEL 4

Table E-1: Gas Sensor Level Setting Value for the Typical Organic Solvent




E-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

2. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents

Hydraulic parts used in the FPIA-3000S are made of materials that are resistant to the organic

solvents listed in the Table E-2 “List of Recognized Organic Solvents”.

CAUTION• Table E-2 “List of Recognized Organic Solvents” shows the applicability and

compatibility of the hydraulic parts against the organic solvent, well focusedparticle images may not be obtained depending on the viscosity and specificgravity of the organic solvent since a stable sheath is not formed. If the ignitionpoint, the boiling point, or the melting point is very low, there is a potential of afire or an explosion.

• FPIA-3000S specifications are assured only when the PARTICLE SHEATH isused as the sheath fluid. When an organic solvent is used, the particle imagemay be different due to the refractive index of the solvent used. Accordingly, theanalysis results of the particle diameter and the circularity may be different fromthose analyzed using the PARTICLE SHEATH.

No. Name of the Organic Solvent

1 2,2-dimethyl butane

2 2,3-dimethyl butane

3 2-n-butoxyl ethanol

4 4-hydroxy 4-methyl 2-pentanone

5 n-butyl acetate

6 n-hexane

7 n-heptane

8 α-terpineol

9 acrylic acid

10 ethyl acrylate

11 butyl acrylate

12 methyl acrylate

13 acrylonitrile

14 butoxy ethanol adipate

15 acetyl acetone

16 acetonitrile

17 acetophenone

18 acetone

19 methyl acetoacetate

20 aniline

21 amino alcohol

22 amyl chloronaphthalene

23 amyl naphthalene

Table E-2: List of Recognized Organic Solvents





24 iso dodecane

25 isophorone

26 isobutyl alcohol

27 isobutyl aldehyde

28 isobutyl ether

29 isopropyl alcohol

30 isopropyl ether

31 isobutyric acid

32 ethanol

33 ethyl cyclopentane

34 ethyl benzene

35 ethylene glycol

36 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether

37 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate38 ethylene chlorohydrin

39 ethylene diamine

40 epichlorohydrin

41 octyl alcohol

42 ortho chloro ethyl benzene

43 ortho di chloro benzene

44 butyl oleate

45 methyl oleate

46 xylene

47 glyceric acetate

48 m-cresol

49 chloro acetone

50 chloro aniline

51 chloro dodecane

52 1-chloro naphthalene

53 chloroprene monomer

54 chloro bromo methane

55 chloroform

56 chloro ethyl carbonate57 diethylamin

58 diethyl sulfate

59 diethyl sebacate

60 diethyl benzene

61 diethylene glycol







62 dioxane

63 dioxolanes

64 cyclohexanone

65 cyclohexane

66 dichloro isopropyl ether

67 dichloro butane

68 dicyclohexylamine

69 dibutyl amin

70 dibutyl ether

71 dibenzyl ether

72 dipentene

73 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)

74 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)

75 silicone oil76 styrene monomer

77 cetane

78 dioctyl sebacate

79 dibutyl sebacate

80 dibenzyl sebacate

81 tertiary butyl ethyl ether

82 tertiary butyl mercaptan

83 decane

84 dextron

85 tetra chloro ethane

86 tetrachloroethylene

87 tetrahydrofuran

88 tetra butyl titanate

89 tetralin

90 oil of turpentine

91 tosyl aldinin methyl ether

92 triallylic acid

93 triethylamine

94 tri octyl phosphate95 tri chlocyl phosphate

96 trichloroethane

97 trichloroethylene

98 tributyl phosphate

99 tributoxyethyl phosphate







100 trifluoro ethane

101 toluene

102 nitro propane

103 nitro benzene

104 nitro methane

105 dibromide ethyl

106 neville acid

107 p-tertiary butyl caltechol

108 hydrazine

109 pinene

110 pyridine

111 phenyl ethyl ether

112 phenyl hydrazine

113 di-octyl phthalate114 dibutyl phthalate

115 dimetyl phthalate

116 butyl acetyl ricinoleate

117 butyl amine

118 butyl alcohol

119 butyl aldehyde

120 butyl Carbitol

121 furfural

122 furfuryl alcohol

123 freon 32

124 propionic nitril

125 propyl alcohol

126 propylene glycol

127 halotane

128 bromobenzene

129 hexa chloro acetone

130 benzyl alcohol

131 benzene (benzol)

132 benzo trichloride133 polyethylene glycol

134 form amide

135 mesityl oxide

136 acrylic acid

137 methyl acrylate







138 methanol

139 methyl isobutyl ketone

140 methyl ethyl ketone

141 methyl chloroformate

142 methyl cyclo pentane

143 methyl cellulose

144 methyl cellosolve

145 methyl butyl ketone

146 methyl butyl ether

147 monochloro benzene

148 mono vinyl acetylene

149 mono bromo benzene

150 mono methyl aniline

151 sodium Ritalinic acid152 linoleic acid

153 ethyl benzoate

154 methyl benzoate

155 acetyl chloride

156 aluminum chloride

157 isobutyl chloride

158 isopropyl chloride

159 cyanogen chloride

160 benzoyl chloride

161 saline water

162 sea water

163 petroleum

164 trichloroacetic acid

165 tetra ethyl lead

166 tetra bromo ethane

167 tetra bromo ethane

168 heavy water

169 amyl acetate

170 isopropyl acetate171 ethyl acetate

172 vinyl acetate

173 butyl acetate

174 propyl acetate

175 methyl acetate







176 water

177 soapy solution

178 kerosene

179 glacial acetic acid







Blank page.




APPENDIX F FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE

1. Focus adjusting particle...............................................................................F-1

2. Preparation of focus adjustment sample .....................................................F-2



FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 F-1

1. Focus adjusting particle

The focus adjusting particle varies on the type of the sheath fluid.

1) When the PARTICLE SHEATH is used for the sheath fluid:

Use the polystyrene latex particle with 2 micro m in diameter, shown below.

Polystyrene latex particle

Manufacturer: Duke Scientific Corporation

Product name: Polymer Microspheres

Model: 5200A

Particle diameter: 2 µm (The particle diameter slightly varies on the production lot.)

Shape: True sphere

Specific gravity: 1.05 g/cm3

Reflective index: 1.59

Material: polystyrene

2) When the organic solvent is used for the sheath fluid:

When polystyrene latex particle is used, particles may be swelled or melted depending on the

type of the organic solvent. Particles may not be correctly imaged if the reflective index of the

focus adjustment particle is very close to that of the applied organic solvent. It is recommended

to use the melamine resign particle that is resistant to the organic solvent and reflective index

is relatively big.

Melamine resign particle

Manufacturer: Micro Particles GmbH (Germany)

Product name: Melamine Resign Particles

Model: MF-R-2.0

Particle diameter: 2 µm (The particle diameter slightly varies on the production lot.)

Shape: True sphere

Specific gravity: 1.51g/cm3

Reflective index: 1.62

Material: Melamine resign

NOTE: • To purchase above mentioned melamine resign particle, contact a Sysmex salesrepresentative for information.



FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE

F-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

2. Preparation of focus adjustment sample

The focus adjustment particles are dispersed in the sheath fluid as a dispersion medium, and adjust

the concentration of approx. 30000 particles/ µL.

CAUTION• Auto focus adjustment may not be correctly functioned, if the sample is not

dispersed and the sample contains lots of agglutinated particles. Prepare thesample so that the particles are mono-dispersed.

• When the auto focus adjustment is performed using a sample that wasprepared in a long time ago, the automatic focusing may not be correctlyfunctioned due to re-agglutination of the particles. Use such a sample afterdispersing by using an ultrasonic dispersion device.

NOTE: • When melamine resign particles are dispersed in the organic solvent as a dispersionmedium, add an appropriate amount of the surfactant in accordance with the appliedorganic solvent to obtain a sample without agglutination.

• By using the ultrasonic dispersion device, a sample can be prepared with lesseragglutination.




APPENDIX G ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL

(OPTIONAL)

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit)................................ G-11.1 Overview .............................................................................................. G-1

2. Settings and Usage .................................................................................... G-22.1 Settings Details .................................................................................... G-22.2 SOP Settings........................................................................................ G-4

3. Background Count Generated by Erosion.................................................. G-53.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit ....................................... G-53.2 When using the High Magnification Unit .............................................. G-63.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit ............................................... G-7

4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned............................. G-7



ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 G-1

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit)

1.1 Overview

Ultrasonic dispersion unit illuminates the sample in the sample chamber in the FPIA-3000 to help

the sample dispersed. Former sample preparation in the ultrasonic bath can be performed in theFPIA-3000.

The ultrasonic probe which generates the ultrasonic in the Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit is constructed

with a bolted Langevin-type transducer (vibrator) that piezoelectric element is sandwiched between

two metal blocks and an energy concentration horn. The ultrasonic probe is mounted in the position

where the tip of the energy concentration horn is dipped in the sample in the sample mixing

chamber, as shown in the Figure G-1, is energized by the mode set by the FPIA-3000 program

menu, and helps to disperse the sample. The output frequency by the ultrasonic vibrator is

approximately 30 kHz and output energy is approximately 15 W. The output energy can be changed

by the FPIA-3000 program menu.

Figure G-1: Structure of the Ultrasonic Probe

Figure G-2: The Horn Part

Metal block

Piezoelectric element

Metal block

Energy concentration forn




G-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

2. Settings and Usage

2.1 Settings Details

1 Select [Measure] - [Measure] and the [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.

Figure G-3: [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog

Place a check mark in the [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] and press the [Set Detail]

button. Then, the [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog appears as shown in Figure G-4.

Check Box for "Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters" [Set Detail] Button





Figure G-4: [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog

2 The [Testing Unit Status] displays the setting parameters for the ultrasonic dispersion unit,

as shown in the Table G-1.

Item Explanation Settings

Ultrasonic Power Set the ultrasonic output strength in the range of 5-100%.

5-100 (%)

Mid-Test Irradiation Set if the ultrasonic scan is performed during testing. Apply/Not Apply

Pre-Test IrradiationTime

Set the ultrasonic scan time in prior to testing. Noultrasonic scan is performed if 0 (zero) is set.

0-300 seconds

Table G-1: Explanation of the setting items





Figure G-5: Ultrasonic Scan Sequence

3 After setting each item, press the [Close] button to save the settings.

4 Run the program.

2.2 SOP Settings

Various setting items for the Ultrasonic dispersion unit can be registered in the SOP settings. When

analyzed with selecting the SOP settings that have registered with ultrasonic scan conditions,

ultrasonic scan will be performed automatically.

Refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS for more information on the SOP Settings.

CAUTION • When a sample is supplied to the sample mixing chamber, make sure that thetip of the horn is dipped in the sample. If ultrasonic scan were performedwithout dipping the tip of the horn in the sample, it may cause a permanentdamage to the electronic circuitry.

• When ultrasonic scan is performed, a background count arises due to theerosion.When analyzing with irradiating the ultrasonic dispersion unit, confirm that thebackground count by the erosion will not affect the results significantly. Refer tothe "4.Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned" for thebackground count by the erosion.The erosion is defined that the tip of the horn is damaged by the ultrasonicshock generated by itself and a part of the horn is disengaged.

• It should be noted that when ultrasonic scan is performed for a prolonged periodof time, the sample temperature will be arisen due to the heated horn. Refer to

the Appendix G:"4.Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned" forthe arisen temperature.• The sample dispersion effect will depend on the ultrasonic scan strength,

sample volume and the type of dispersion medium.

WARNINGThe Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit shall be used only if its sheath liquid is "PARTICLESHEATH" or "Water".Do not use any combustible liquid(such as alcohol) as sheath liquid because ofignition.

Testing sequence

Preparing

in prior totesting

Displaying a

dialog waitingfor sample

introduction

Ultrasonic

irradiation inprior to testing

Testing

Sample

introduction

Pre-Test Irradiation Testing

Ultrasonic scan

is performed in

prior to testing

for the time set

in the "Pre-Test

Irradiation Time".

Ultrasonic scan

is performed if

"Mid-Test Irradiation"

is set to "Apply".





3. Background Count Generated by Erosion

When ultrasonic scan is performed, the tip of the horn is disengaged due to erosion. This increases

the background count. The disengaged particle size is distributed in the area less than 10 µm. The

reference background count is shown in the Tables G-2 through G-7. Please use these tables as a

reference because the background count by erosion varies depending on the material itself.

3.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit

When 1 minute of ultrasonic scan is performed in the 5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH as a sample,

the background count (effective analyzed count) is shown in the Table G-2.

When 1 minute of ultrasonic scan is performed in the 2.5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH as a sample,


Ultrasound strength Background count (effective analyzed count)

HPFx20 LPFx5

5% Approx. 5 counts Approx. 5 counts

10% Approx. 5 counts Approx. 5 counts20% Approx. 5 counts Approx. 5 counts





Table G-2:


HPFx20 LPFx5







100% Approx. 100 counts Approx. 130 countsTable G-3:





3.2 When using the High Magnification Unit





Ultrasound strength Background count (effective analyzed count)HPFx40 LPFx10








Table G-4:


HPFx40 LPFx10








Table G-5:





3.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit





4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned

The sample temperature will arise approximately 10ºC when the ultrasonic scan strength is 100%,

the scan time is 10 minutes and the dispersion medium is 5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH.

Ultrasound strength Background count (effective analyzed count)HPFx10 LPFx2.5








Table G-6:


HPFx10 LPFx2.5








Table G-7:





Blank page.




APPENDIX H HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT

MANUAL (OPTION)

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit.................................................................... H-11.1 Features ............................................................................................... H-11.2 General Information of the Lens Unit ................................................... H-2

2. Installation .................................................................................................. H-3

2.1 Preparation for installation ................................................................... H-32.2 Installation (Changing hardware) ......................................................... H-4

3. Preparation for testing .............................................................................. H-113.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................ H-11

4. Testing...................................................................................................... H-18

5. Analyze..................................................................................................... H-19

6. SOP settings ............................................................................................ H-20

7. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit) .......................... H-21

8. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit)........................... H-26



HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 H-1

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit

1.1 Features

FPIA-3000 is built with 10x objective lens as a standard unit. FPIA-3000 has an optional lens unit,

which includes 5x and 20x objective lens. These lens can be replaced by each customer.

By using the appropriate lens unit that fits for the customer application of each sample size, variety

of samples can be measured accurately.




H-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

1.2 General Information of the Lens Unit

FPIA-3000 is designed to change the magnification by replacing the objective lens and ND (Neutral

Density) filter. The Lens Unit is for the replacement lens unit and is consisted of the following

parts.

High or Low Magnification Lens can be used after replacing and adjusting the objective lens and

ND filter.

When the optional Lens Unit is used, the measuring magnification and the measuring range of theFPIA-3000 is as follows.

Lens Unit Objective lens ND Filter

High Magnification Unit LUCPLFLN 20x AND-40C-70

Low Magnification Unit UMPLFL 5x AND-40C-50

Standard Unit UPLSAPO 10x AND-40C-20

Table H-1: Consisted Parts in the Lens Unit

Lens Unit Magnification

of Objective

lens

Measurement

mode

Total Magnifi-

cation

Measurement

Range (um)

High MagnificationUnit

20x HPF (High Power Field) 40x 0.8 - 20

LPF (Low Power Field) 10x 4.0 - 80

Low MagnificationUnit

5x HPF (High Power Field) 10x 3.0 - 80

LPF (Low Power Field) 2.5x 16.0 - 300

Standard Unit 10x HPF (High Power Field) 20x 1.5 - 40

LPF (Low Power Field) 5x 8.0 - 160

Table H-2: FPIA-3000 Measuring Magnification and Measuring Range with High or Low

Magnification Lens Unit





2. Installation

2.1 Preparation for installation

2.1.1. IntroductionInitial installation and settings will be performed by a Sysmex service representative. After the

initial installation and settings, replacing the lens unit can be performed by the customer.

2.1.2. Unpacking Check List

FPIA-3000 Lens Unit is consisted of the following parts. At the initial installation or when

replacing the lens unit, check that all necessary parts exist and no significant damage is observed.

High Magnification Unit

Low Magnification Unit

Description Remarks

Objectivelens

LUCPLFLN 20x Magnification: 20xN.A. (Numerical Aperture): 0.45

ND Filter AND-40C-70 Transmittancy: 70%

Table H-3: Unpacking Check List (High Magnification Unit)

Description Remarks

Objectivelens

UMPLFL 5x Magnification: 5xN.A. (Numerical Aperture): 0.15

ND Filter AND-40C-70 Transmittancy: 70%

Table H-4: Unpacking Check List (Low Magnification Unit)





2.2 Installation (Changing hardware)

Perform the hardware changes in (1) replacing the objective lens, (2) replacing the ND filter, and

(3) adjusting the condenser N.A., as follows.


Figure H-1: Remove the testing unit covers

2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its original place.

Figure H-2: Return the drive unit to its original place

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power prior to changing hardware.

Testing unit cover

Drive unit






Figure H-3: Remove the central cover fastening screws


cover.

Figure H-4: Detach the LED cable

Pay attention not to forcibly pull the LED cable.


Figure H-5: Remove the central cover

LED cable

Central cover






Figure H-6: Remove the shade cover fastening screws7 Remove the shade cover.

Figure H-7: Remove the shade cover

Shade cover

Shade cover





8 Loosen the lens holder fixing screw and draw out the lens holder completely.

Figure H-8: Remove the lens holder

9 Replace the objective lens by the desired one.

Figure H-9: Replace the objective lens

10 Fit the lens holder into the testing unit so that the portion with no corners is innermost. Slide the

lens holder all the way until it hits the positioning pin.

11Use the lens holder fastening screw to fasten the lens holder.

Figure H-10: Fasten the lens holder

Lens holder


Objective lens

Lens holder

Lens holder






12 Loosen the ND filter fixing screw, and remove the ND filter. Place the desired ND filter and

tighten the ND filter with the ND filter fixing screw. (Pay attention to the direction of the ND

filter. See Figure H-12 for the direction.)

Figure H-11: Replace the ND filter

Figure H-12: Mounting direction of the ND filter

Install the ND filter so that the fixture is positioned to the right-hand side.

ND Filter Fixing Screws

Fixture





13 Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob.

Figure H-13: Loosen the locking screw for the N.A. adjustment knob

14 Adjust the NA adjustment knob at the position shown in the following table, and tighten the

locking screw.

Lens Unit Position of the NA adjustment knob

Standard Unit

Align the Surface A, which is the facing surface of the NA adjustment knob, atthe graduated dial 0.2

High MagnificationUnit

Align the Surface A, which is the facing surface of the NA adjustment knob, atthe graduated dial 0.2

Table H-5: Adjust the NA adjustment knob

Locking screw

NA Adjustment Knob

Surface A

Surface A






16 Perform the same procedures when the optional lens unit is replaced by the standard unit.

Low MagnificationUnit

Align the Surface A, which is the facing surface of the NA adjustment knob, atthe minimum graduated dial.

Lens Unit Position of the NA adjustment knob

Table H-5: Adjust the NA adjustment knob

Surface A





3. Preparation for testing


3.1.1. Starting the testing unitTurn ON the power switch by referring to Chapter 3: "2. Turning on the device".

3.1.2. Starting the Analysis Program

1 Double click on the FPIA-3000 shortcut on the Windows desktop.


2 Enter the logon ID and password as in table H-6. Press the [Setting] button to change the

objective lens.

Figure H-14: [Logon] dialog

NOTE: • If the FPIA-3000 does not start, use one of the procedures below to start it.- Click through [Windows taskbar ] - [Start] button - [Programs] - [Sysmex] - [FPIA-3000].- Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.

Set Items Explanations

Logon ID Enter the previously assigned login ID.Refer to the FPIA-3000 Operator’s Manual, Chapter 13, USER

AUTHENTICATION for the acceptable characters.

Password Enter the previously assigned password.The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks "*". Refer to theFPIA-3000 Operator’s Manual, Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION for the

acceptable characters.


Place a check mark in the [Start Testing Unit] check box, when only the storeddata is reviewed and you do not need to star t the Testing Unit.

[Setting] button Displays [Logon Setting] dialog.

[OK] button Starts up the Testing Unit and analysis software.

[Cancel] button Cancels Testing Unit startup.

Table H-6: Logon screen items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Figure H-15: [Logon] dialog

3 Press the down arrow of the LensUnit Setting to select an Objective lens to use from the Lens Unit

installed in FPIA-3000. You can select 5X (Low magnification), 10X (Standard), or 20X (High).

4 After selecting an objective lens, press [OK] to return to the [Logon] dialog.

5 Press the [OK] button in the [Logon] dialog.

If selected is a different Objective Lens that were used in the last time when shut down, the


Figure H-16: Logon Dialog (Selected Lens Unit is different)

If OK, press the [ Yes] button. The process will continue. If [No] is pressed, you will return to the

[Logon] dialog.





3.1.3. Replacing the Sheath Fluid

If the sheath fluid is PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

The following dialog box will appear and the startup process will be executed.

When the startup process is complete, the system enters standby mode.

Figure H-17: [Startup Sequence] dialog

If the sheath fluid is not PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

If the system was using alcohol the last time it was shut down, the following dialog box will appear:

Press to change the sheath fluid.

A list of sheath fluid options is displayed, so select the one to use.

Figure H-18: [Startup Settings] dialog





2 Connect the sheath fluid to be used to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple.

Figure H-19: Sheath fluid replacement

3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple, then press the

[Run] button.


Figure H-20: [Cleaning pressure settings] dialog

4 Set the cleaning pressure to match the sheath fluid used.

When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (See Chapter 14, 2.3.

"Adjustment of rinse pressure") The startup process runs.

Sheath fluid aspiration nipple

Sheath fluidcontainer

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





If the following dialog was displayed during the startup of the Testing Unit, press the [Alarm Reset]

button, stop the alarm, and press the [Error Recovery] button after the button becomes effective.

Figure H-21: [Error History] dialog

When the error is resolved, the start process will continue.

If the error cannot be resolved, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.

Execute the process described in the 3.1.4."Process executed after replacing the Lens Unit".

If the FPIA-3000 is run without replacing the Lens Unit, execute the procedures described in the

3.1.5."Background Check" and following sections.

NOTE: • After switching the instrument power on, wait approximately one hour for its internaltemperature to stabilize.

• Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the procedureon the next page to run a background check and auto focus adjustment.

http://-/?-





3.1.4. Process executed after replacing the Lens Unit

Immediately after replacing the Lens Unit, focusing and electronic flash brightness are out of

alignment. It is necessary to execute the sequences of the flash brightness adjustment and the

manual focus adjustment.

When the background check dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the backgroundcheck.

Figure H-22: [Background check] dialog

When the automatic focusing adjustment dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the

automatic focusing adjustment.

Figure H-23: [Focus Adjusting] dialog

Select [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Adjustment of the flash brightness].

The testing unit is adjusted with the most appropriate stroboscope brightness.

Then perform the manual focus adjustment, by referring to Chapter 15: "2.3 Manual focusing".

Then, perform the background check and the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3:

"3.3 Background Check" and Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing".

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





3.1.5. Background Check

Perform the background check by referring to Chapter 3: "3.3 Background Check".

3.1.6. Automatic Focus Adjustment

Perform the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing".

1 Check Magnification

Select [Test]-[Test]. The [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.

Figure H-24: [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog

The selected lens magnification is displayed to the right of the measurement and analytical

conditions.

NOTE: • To perform the automatic focus adjustment, prepare 5 mL or more of the certainconcentration of the adjustment fluid to make the focus adjustment latex dispersed inthe PARTICLE SHEATH.

Lens Unit Original Latex fluid Concentration

High Magnification Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5100A(1.0 µm)

Approx. 200,000/ µL

Low Magnification Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5312A(3.1 µm)

Approx. 5,000/ µL

Standard Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5200A(2.0 µm)

Approx. 30,000/ µL

Table H-7: Latex fluid for the automatic focus adjustment

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





4. Testing

For the testing procedures, refer to Chapter 4, TESTING.

If you have any troubles, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





5. Analyze

For the data analysis, refer to Chapter 5, RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING.

Followings are the notes specifically applied to the optional Lens Unit.

CAUTIONTwo records which were obtained in the different magnifications will not bemerged.Two records which were obtained in the different magnifications will not beoverlapped of their graphs.Two records which were obtained in the different magnifications will not begraphed or trended.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





6. SOP settings

For the explanation, use, register, edit and delete of SOP, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS .

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





7. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit)

Purpose

To test and analyze the sizes and shapes of various particles and cells in the fields of medical


Test Conditions

1) Subjects of analysis



2) Dispersion media

Water based:PARTICLE SHEATH

Alcohol based:Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)

* Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath fluid or dispersion medium is not

guaranteed.

3) Test range


When HPF is independently tested: 0.8 to 20 µm

When LPF is independently tested: 4.0 to 80 µm

Circularity measurement range: 0.200-1.000


When HPF is independently tested: 360,000 cells/ µL when particles of which diameter is

approximately 0.5 to 3 µm are measured.When LPF is independently tested: 360,000 cells/ µL when particles of which diameter is

approximately 4 µm are measured.


5) Required sample volume: 5 mL

6) Throughput

7) Sample volume analyzed

HPF mode: Approx. 0.035 µL

LPF mode: Approx. 0.55 µL


HPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour

LPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour

Table H-8: Throughput





Test items and display items

1) Analysis parametersThe analysis parameters are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B,

SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S .

2) Displayed Items

The display items are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B, SPECIFICATION

AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S .

Required reagents and their consumption

At startup

During Testing

At shutdown

When replacing sheath fluid


Ambient temperature: 15 - 30ºC

Relative humidity: 30 - 85%


NOTE: When the sheath fluid and dispersion media are not PARTICLE SHEATH, analysisresults other than the area, circular diameter and circularity are not guaranteed.

Reagents used Consumption

PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) Approx. 90 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) Approx. 70 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic focus adjustment) Approx. 170 mL






Reagent to be replaced (PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol) Approx. 710 mL

Table H-9: Reagents and their consumption

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Precision

1) Accuracy

Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples


Item Analysismode

Sample Particlediameter

(µm)

Concentration(x103 particles/

mL)

Standardvalues:

Averagediameter

HPF Duke Latex 3800A 0.8 Approx. 10,000 ±3%

HPF Duke Latex 4205A 5 Approx. 1,000 ±3%

HPF Duke Latex 4220A 20 Approx. 200 ±3%

LPF Duke Latex 4220A 20 Approx. 200 ±3%

Averagecircularity

HPF Sysmex FPIAStandard Particle(FSH-100A)

2 Approx. 20,000 ±0.5%

LPF Sysmex FPIAStandard Particle(FSL-100A)

16 Approx. 1,000 ±0.5%

Particledensity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±10%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±10%

Table H-10: Accuracy






Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the

samples below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values

below.

Item Analysismode

Sample Particlediameter

(µm)


mL)

Standardvalues

Averagediameter


2 Approx. 20,000 ±1%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±1%

10%diameter


2 Approx. 20,000 ±3%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±3%

90%diameter


2 Approx. 20,000 ±3%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±3%

Averagecircularity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±0.3%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±0.3%

Particledensity


2 Approx. 20,000 ±10%


16 Approx. 1,000 ±10%

Table H-11: Reproducibility





3) Carryover

Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples

below are measured will be within the range of rated values below.

1 µm PSL, approx. 1,700,000 x103pieces/mL (DUKE Latex 5100A)


NOTE: • The diameters of latex particles 3800A, 4205A and 4220A used in this test areguaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (National Institute ofStandards and Technology) standards.

• Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed, produced andmanaged by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement of average circularityand particle density by the FPIA-3000.





8. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit)

Purpose

To test and analyze the sizes and shapes of various particles and cells in the fields of medical


Test Conditions

1) Subjects of analysis



2) Dispersion media

Water based: PARTICLE SHEATH

Alcohol based: Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)

* Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath fluid or dispersion

medium is not guaranteed.

3) Test range


When HPF is independently tested: 3.0 to 80 µm

When LPF is independently tested: 16 to 300 µm

Circularity measurement range: 0.200-1.000


When HPF is independently tested: 8,000 cells/ µL when particles of which diameter is

approximately 3 to 12 µm are measured.When LPF is independently tested: 8,000 cells/ µL when particles of which diameter is

approximately 16 µm are measured.


5) Required sample volume: 5 mL

6) Throughput

7) Sample volume analyzed

HPF mode: Approx. 1.55 µL

LPF mode: Approx. 10.5 µL


HPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour

LPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour

Table H-12: Throughput





Test items and display items

1) Analysis parametersThe analysis parameters are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B,

SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S .

2) Displayed Items

The displayed items are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B, SPECIFICATION

AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S .

Required reagents and their consumption

At startup

During Testing

At shutdown

When replacing sheath fluid


Ambient temperature: 15 - 30ºCRelative humidity: 30% to 85%


NOTE: When the sheath fluid and dispersion media are not PARTICLE SHEATH, analysisresults other than the area, circular diameter and circularity are not guaranteed.


PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) Approx. 90 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) Approx. 70 mL

PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic focus adjustment) Approx. 170 mL






Reagent to be replaced (PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol) Approx. 710 mL

Table H-13: Reagents and their consumption

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Precision

1) Accuracy

Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples


Item Analysis

mode

Sample Particle

diameter

(µm)

Concen-

tration

(x103 par-

ticles/mL)

Standard values

Averagediameter

HPF Duke Latex 4203A 3 Approx.500

±3%




Averagecircularity

HPF Sysmex FPIAStandard Particle(FSL-100A)

16 Approx.1,000

±0.5%

LPF - - - -

Particledensity


16 Approx.1,000

±10%


16 Approx.1,000

±10%

Table H-14: Accuracy






Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the

samples below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values

below.

3) Carryover

Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples

below are measured will be within the range of rated values below.

3.1 µm PSL, approx. 40,000 x103pieces/mL (DUKE Latex 5312A)


Item Analysismode

Sample Diameter(µm)


mL)

Standardvalues

Averagediameter


16 Approx. 1,000 ±1%


10%diameter


16 Approx. 1,000 ±3%


90%diameter


16 Approx. 1,000 ±3%


Averagecircularity


16 Approx. 1,000 ±0.3%

LPF Duke Latex 7545A 42 Approx. 100 ±0.3%

Particledensity


16 Approx. 1,000 ±10%


Table H-15: Reproducibility

NOTE: • The diameters of latex particles 4203A, 4220A and 4280A used in this test areguaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (National Institute ofStandards and Technology) standards.

• Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed, produced andmanaged by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement of average circularityand particle density by the FPIA-3000.





Blank page.




APPENDIX I PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11)......................... I-11.1 Features ................................................................................................. I-1

2. Installation of the Part 11 Software .............................................................. I-22.1 Install...................................................................................................... I-2

3. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software ........................................................ I-33.1 Preparation for testing............................................................................ I-33.2 Testing ................................................................................................... I-33.3 Stored Data Display and Processing ..................................................... I-33.4 Error Treatment...................................................................................... I-33.5 SOP settings .......................................................................................... I-33.6 User Verification..................................................................................... I-33.7 Audit Trail Function ................................................................................ I-4

3.8 Others .................................................................................................... I-4

4. Audit trail ...................................................................................................... I-6

4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ I-64.2 Reviewing audit trail ............................................................................... I-64.3 CSV Export ............................................................................................ I-84.4 Print........................................................................................................ I-84.5 Filter ....................................................................................................... I-9

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 I-1

1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11)

1.1 Features

The optional software conforming to 21 CFR Part 11 is based on the guidelines shown by the

United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and provides following functions.

• Audit trail function

FPIA-3000 operation histories are stored in a record as an audit trail.

• Conforms to the electronic signature

Analysis results can be output in the form of a PDF file with an electronic signature, which is

a feature of PDFs.

• Individuals authentication function

Different access levels can be set for different logon users so as to limit the features that users

can use according to their access level. FPIA-3000 standard functions include this. For more

information refer to Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION .

NOTE: • The 21 CFR (Code of federal regulations) Part 11 is a mandatory regulation of theUnited States Food and Drug Administration for the electronic submission, electronicrecords and electronic signature of the application documents.

• The PDF (Portable Document Format) is a publicly available file format used todistribute and exchange the electronic document through the internet.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




I-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005

2. Installation of the Part 11 Software

2.1 Install

Installation of the Part 11 software is performed by a Sysmex representative.

CAUTIONOnce the Part 11 software was installed on the FPIA-3000, you cannot uninstallthe Part 11 software.





3. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software

3.1 Preparation for testing

Prepare the sample by referring to the Chapter 3, PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING.

3.2 Testing

Test the sample by referring to the Chapter 4, TESTING.

3.3 Stored Data Display and Processing

Table I-1 shows the differences between the standard application and the Part 11 application.

3.4 Error Treatment

For the procedures to treat an error, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.

3.5 SOP settings

The differences from the FPIA-3000 standard application are shown below.

The [Del.SOP] and [Save] button are removed in the SOP Settings dialog, and deleting and

saving the SOP are not possible. For details, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS .

3.6 User Verification

The differences from the FPIA-3000 standard application are shown below.

The [Delete] button is removed in the user information dialog, and deleting the registered user is

not possible.

CAUTION• If the number of stored records exceeds 1000, a message “You cannot run.

The number of records exceeds the upper limit.” is displayed and you cannotrun a test.If this happens, select [File] - [New] to create a new database to store testrecords. For details, see Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING10.2 NEW in this manual.

• You can run the background check and automatic focus adjustment, even if thenumber of stored records exceeds 1000.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





3.7 Audit Trail Function

This is a newly added function to the Part 11 application. This function automatically records the

operation histories that relates to the analysis results submitted to FDA. For details, refer to 4. Audit

trail.

3.8 Others

For the Quality Control, Display Setup, Print Format, System Adjustment and Maintenance, refer

to the appropriate chapter in the FPIA-3000 Operator’s manual.

Item Standard Software Part 11 Software

Stored Data Display and Processing

Sort functions Yes Yes

Filter function Yes Yes

Search functions Yes YesDisplay reset Yes Yes

Edit Sample information Yes Not available

Batch reanalyze Yes Available only batch reanalyzeand save as function

Deletion Yes Not available

Changing the record display Yes Yes

Processing analysis results

Moving records Yes Yes

Thumbnail image display Yes Yes

Reanalyze using altered analysisconditions

Yes Available to reanalyze, but notavailable to save overwritten. Ifthe number of records exceeds1000, not available to reanalyze

Merging records Yes If the number of records exceeds1000, not available to merge

Changing the display of the AnalysisResults screen

Yes Yes

Particle image list

Particle image list Yes Yes

Detailed information display Yes Yes

Frequency tables Yes Yes

Multi Scattergrams Yes Yes

Graph (Overlay-View) Yes Yes

Detail Results Yes Yes

Graph (Trend-View) Yes Yes

Table I-1: Comparison between Standard and Part 11 Software





File menu

New Yes Yes

Open Yes Yes

Save as Yes Yes

Print Yes Yes

CSV Yes Yes

Data Transmission Yes Yes

PDF Yes Yes

User Authentication Yes Yes(but cannot delete user data)

SOP Settings Yes Yes(but cannot delete SOPinformation)

Audit Trail Not available Yes

Sheath liquid Setting Yes(only FPIA-3000S) Not available

CAUTIONFor the specifications of the audit trail, refer to 4. Audit trail.

Item Standard Software Part 11 Software

Table I-1: Comparison between Standard and Part 11 Software





4. Audit trail

4.1 Introduction

The audit trail function automatically records the operation histories that relate to the analysis

results submitted to FDA.

4.2 Reviewing audit trail

Select [Maintenance] - [Audit Trail] to display all the recorded events list as shown in Figure I-1.

Figure I-1: Audit Trail dialog

Item Functions

CSV button Press the [CSV] button to save the contents displayed in the audit traildialog in the CSV file.

Print button Press the [Print] button to print the contents displayed in the audit traildialog.

Filter button The contents in the audit trail list can be sorted by date, user andevents.

Close button Close the audit trail dialog.

Table I-2: Explanation of the audit trail dialog




Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 I-7

Contents displayed in the audit trail dialog are explained below.

Date:

Records the date and time when the event is written in the audit trail.

User:Records the logged-on user name.

Events:

Records the event item occurred when an event item listed in the Table I-3 was executed.

Details:

Records the details of the event item in the details column when an event item listed in the Table I-

3 is executed.

Event item Details

Run a calibration (particle diameter) Records that the calibration information is updated.

Run a calibration (concentration) Records that the calibration information is updated.

Run an automatic focusing Records that the auto focus adjustment is performed.

Run a background check Records the background count.

Replace the Sheath liquid Records the Sheath liquid name after replaced.

Change or add the sheath liquidsetting(*1)

*1.These functions can be utilized only in FPIA-3000S.

Records the changed item and set value.

Change the detector Records the Light field system and the magnification afterreplaced.

Change the ultrasonic unit Records whether the ultrasonic dispersion unit is installed.

Add or change SOP Records the subjected SOP name.

Change system settings Records the changed item.

Change the user group Records the changed user group name and the changedcontents.

Register a user Records the registered user name.

Change the user registration Records the registered user name and changed contents.

Logging on Records the logged-on user name.

Unauthorized access Records the fact that the account is prohibited to logon.

Table I-3: Explanation of the audit trail contents





4.3 CSV Export

Click on the [CSV] button in the audit trail dialog. A dialog shown in Figure I-2 will be displayed.

Figure I-2: [Audit Trail Save As] dialog

Set the desired directory, enter the file name and save the CSV file.

4.4 Print

Click the [Print] button in the audit trail dialog, a printer setting dialog will be displayed and the

contents in the audit trail dialog can be printed.

The printer setting dialog conforms to the one installed in the personal computer.

Refer to your printer manual for details.





4.5 Filter

Click on the [Filter ] button in the audit trail dialog to display the [Audit Trail Filter ] dialog, as

shown in Figure I-3.

Place a checkmark in the [Specified Execute as for the filter ], check the audit trail filter items

listed in the Table I-4, and click the [OK] button to display the filtered audit trail list in the audit

trail list dialog.

Figure I-3: [Audit Trail filter ] dialog

Item Explanation

Check box to Specify the filter Place a checkmark to validate the filter conditions in the audittrail. Filtered audit trails are listed.

Check box for user name and its listbox

Place a checkmark in the user name check box, and username can be selected in the user name list box, which is usedto filter the audit trails list.

Check box for event and its list box Place a checkmark in the event check box, and event can beselected in the event list box, which is used to filter the audittrails list.

Check box for date, today/date radiobutton, and date list box

Place a checkmark in the date check box, select a radiobutton either today or specified date, and the specified datecondition is used to filter the audit trails list. When specifieddate radio button is selected, date range can be specified.

Table I-4: Audit trails filter items





Blank page.




APPENDIX J FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL

1. Overview ..................................................................................................... J-11.1 Overview ............................................................................................... J-1

1.2 Principle of Dark Field Test ................................................................... J-1

2. Installation ................................................................................................... J-2

3. Specifications .............................................................................................. J-3

4. Changing hardware ..................................................................................... J-4

5. Starting the analysis program.................................................................... J-105.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................. J-105.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid................................................................. J-125.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit....... J-15

5.4 Checking Light Field System............................................................... J-15

6. Testing....................................................................................................... J-16

7. Analyze...................................................................................................... J-17

8. SOP settings ............................................................................................. J-18

9. Maintenance.............................................................................................. J-28

9.1 Quality Control .................................................................................... J-289.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness...................................................... J-28

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 J-1

1. Overview

1.1 Overview

FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit is an optional unit for particle imaging and image analysis using dark

field optical system. The Dark Field Unit can be used for measurement after replacement andadjustment of the illumination lens, and software setting change. The unit can be replaced by each

customer.

* The unit is not supporting the High and Low Magnification options.

1.2 Principle of Dark Field Test

The ring slit for dark field illumination is used to shut out the direct illumination to the objective

lens.

The background is dark since the direct illumination is shut out. When particles exist, scattered light

by particles reaches to the objective lens, and the bright white image of the particle can be obtained.

(Refer to the figure below.)

In the case of dark filed mode, only the images brighter than the background are recognized as

particles, and analyzed.

Figure J-1: Principle of Dark Field Test

Ring slit

Sample

Condenser lens

Dotted line arrow : Scattered light (light scattered by particles reaches to the objective lens)

Solid line arrow : Illumination

Objective lens




J-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

2. Installation

Initial installation and settings will be performed by a Sysmex service representative. After the

initial installation and settings, replacement of the lens unit can be performed by each customer.





3. Specifications

Refer to APPENDIX B for the Specifications/Performances of FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S mounted

with the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





4. Changing hardware

Perform the hardware changes as follows.


Figure J-2: Remove the testing unit covers

2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its original place.

Figure J-3: Return the drive unit to its original place

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power prior to changing hardware.

Testing unit cover

Drive unit






Figure J-4: Remove the central cover fastening screws


cover.

Figure J-5: Detach the LED cable

Pay attention not to forcibly pull the LED cable.


Figure J-6: Remove the central cover

LED cable

Central cover






Figure J-7: Remove the shade cover fastening screws7 Remove the shade cover.

Figure J-8: Remove the shade cover

Shade cover

Shade cover





8 Loosen the ND filter fixing screw, and remove the ND filter.

Figure J-9: Remove the ND filter

9 Remove the Illumination Lens.

Figure J-10: Remove the Illumination Lens

ND Filter Fixing Screws

Illumination lens





10 Attach the Illumination Lens for dark field.

Figure J-11: Attach the Illumination Lens for dark field

* In the case of installing the illumination lens/illumination lens for dark field, align the triangle

arrow at the graduated dial 0.5 as shown in the figure below.

Figure J-12: Aligning the triangle arrow

Illumination lensfor dark field





11Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob.

12 Move the condenser NA adjustment knob all the way in the direction of the arrow.

Figure J-13: Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob


14 In the case of the replacement of FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit with the standard unit, turn off the

power and perform the following procedures.

Procedures for the replacement of FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit with the standard unit

1) Remove the covers.

2) Adjust the condenser NA adjustment knob.

For the position of the condenser NA adjustment knob, refer to the Figures on H-9 & H-10 of

APPENDIX H, HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION).

3) Replace the illumination lens.

Replace the illumination lens for dark field with the standard illumination lens.

4) Return the ND filter to its original position.

5) Return the other covers.

After the hardware change, start the analysis program and change settings.

Locking screw

NA Adjustment Knob

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





5. Starting the analysis program


Start the analysis program as follows.

1 Turn ON the power switch of the testing unit by referring to the Chapter 3, Turning on the device.

2 Double click on the FPIA-3000 shortcut on the Windows desktop.


3 Enter the logon ID and password as in table J-6. Press the [Setting] button to change the Lightfield system.

Figure J-14: [Logon] dialog

NOTE: • If the FPIA-3000 does not start, use one of the procedures below to start it.- Click through [Windows taskbar ] - [Start] button - [Programs] - [Sysmex] - [FPIA-3000].- Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.

Set Items Explanations

Logon ID Enter the previously assigned logon ID.Refer to the FPIA-3000 Operator's Manual, Chapter 13, USER

AUTHENTICATION for the acceptable characters.

Password Enter the previously assigned password.The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks “ * ”. Refer to theFPIA-3000 Operator's Manual, Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION for theacceptable characters.


Place a check mark in the [Start Testing Unit] check box, when only the storeddata is reviewed and you do not need to start the Testing Unit.

[Setting] button Displays [Logon Setting] dialog.

[OK] button Starts up the Testing Unit and analysis software.

[Cancel] button Cancels Testing Unit startup.

Table J-1: Logon screen items

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Figure J-15: [Logon Setting] dialog

4 Press the down arrow of the Light field system to select a Light field system to use from the

systems installed in FPIA-3000. You can choose Bright field or Dark field.

5 After selecting the Light field system to use, press the [OK] button to return to the [Logon]

dialog.

6 Press the [OK] button of the [Logon] dialog.

If the selected Light field system is different from the one used at the last shutdown, the following


Figure J-16: Logon dialog (Selected Light field system is different)

If OK, press the [ Yes] button. The process will continue. If [No] is pressed, you will return to the

[Logon] dialog.





5.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid

If the sheath fluid is PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

The following dialog box will appear and the startup process will be executed.When the startup process is complete, the system enters standby mode.

Figure J-17: [Startup Sequence] dialog

If the sheath fluid is not PARTICLE SHEATH

1 Run the program.

If the system was using alcohol at the last shutdown, the following dialog box will appear:

Press to change the sheath fluid.

A list of sheath fluid options is displayed, so select the one to use.

Figure J-18: [Startup Settings] dialog





2 Connect the sheath fluid to be used to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple.

Figure J-19: Sheath fluid replacement

3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple, then press the

[Run] button.The following dialog will be displayed.

Figure J-20: [Cleaning pressure settings] dialog

4 Set the cleaning pressure to match the sheath fluid used.

When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (See Chapter 14, 2.3.

"Adjustment of rinse pressure") The startup process runs.

NOTE: • After switching the instrument power on, wait approximately one hour for its internaltemperature to stabilize.• Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the procedure

on the following pages to run a background check and auto focus adjustment.

sheath liquid aspiration nipple

Connect to sheath liquid container

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





If the following dialog was displayed during the startup of the Testing Unit, press the [Stop

Alarm] button, stop the alarm, and press the [Recover ] button after the button becomes effective.

Figure J-21: [Error History] dialog

When the error is resolved, the start process will continue.

If the error cannot be resolved, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.

Execute the process described in the 5.3 “Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 DarkField Unit” after switching to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit

Immediately after replacing to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit, it is necessary to execute the

sequence of the manual focus adjustment.

When the background check dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the background

check.

Figure J-22: [Background Check] dialog

When the automatic focusing adjustment dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the

automatic focusing adjustment.

Figure J-23: [Focus Adjusting] dialog

Perform the manual focus adjustment, by referring to Chapter 15: "2.3 Manual focusing" .

Then perform the background check and the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3:"3.3 Background Check" and Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing" .

5.4 Checking Light Field System

In the case of Dark Field Unit, “DF” appears in the title of the main screen.

Figure J-24: Main screen

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





6. Testing

For the testing procedures, refer to Chapter 4, TESTING.

NOTE: If you have any troubles, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





7. Analyze

For the data analysis, refer to Chapter 5, RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING.

The following is the note specifically applied to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.

CAUTIONTwo records obtained in the different light field systems will not be merged.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





8. SOP settings

For the explanation, use, register, edit and delete of SOP, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS .

The following tables explain SOP settings dialog displayed when [Settings] - [SOP] is selected.

Groups Items Units

Testing Parameters Magnification

Auto Merge

Full Range

By Time/By Counts

Count Limit Particles

Repeat Times Times

SOP Update Date

Sheath Liquid Parameters Sheath Liquid

Testing Unit Status RPM Target rpm

RPM Range rpm

Particle Parameters BG Correction

Smoothing Filter

Edge Enhancing Level

Coef. A for Binarizing

Diameter Correction

Statistics Parameters Dilution Ratio

Smoothing

Miles-Lantuejoul Method

Density Correction

Limit Analysis Parameters Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





IP Board Settings Minimum Pixel

Median Filter

Threshold Level Coef.[a]

Extended Analysis 1 Analysis Type

Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis DivShape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

Polygon Limit Point


Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis Div

Shape Upper LimitShape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %

Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

Polygon Limit Point

Groups Items Units






Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit


Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

Polygon Limit Point


Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit

Shape Upper % %

Shape Lower % %Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

Polygon Limit Point

Groups Items Units





Supplementary explanation:

1. Testing Parameters

1) Magnification

You can select from three modes: HPF, LPF, and LPF -> HPF.

2) Auto Merge

If you select [Apply] and set repeat count up as more than 2 in Stop by Time, all measured

data will be merged automatically and new merged records will be generated after all repeat

measurement has been finished.


Size Type

Size-DspAxis Div

Size Upper Limit um

Size Lower Limit um

Size Upper % %

Size Lower % %

Size-DspAxis Max um

Size-DspAxis Min um

Shape Type

Shape-DspAxis Div

Shape Upper Limit

Shape Lower Limit


Shape-DspAxis Max

Shape-DspAxis Min

Polygon Limit Point

User definition Definition 1

Definition 2

Definition 3

Definition 4

Definition 5

Definition 6

Definition 7

Definition 8

Definition 9

Definition 10

Groups Items Units





3) Full Range

If you select [Analyze], records of full range will be generated after LPF/HPF measure if

you measured in full range mode. For details refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL

DESCRIPTION .

4) By time/By count

You can select quantity count or total count.5) Count Limit

When you select total count mode, you can set the number for reaching the target.


6) Repeat Times

When you select quantity count mode, you can set the number of measurement repetitions.

Up to 20 can be set.

7) SOP Update Date

You can view the day when SOP configuration information is updated (cannot be edited

here).

2. Sheath Liquid Parameters

1) Sheath Liquid

You can select the sheath liquid used for measurement.

You can select from particle sheath, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and ethylene glycol.

3. Testing Unit Status

1) RPM Target

You can set the target value for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.

You can set from 50 to 750 rpm.

2) RPM Range

You can set the rpm monitoring range for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.

If you input 100 rpm, the rotation rate is monitored ±100 rpm of the mixer rpm target value.

4. Particle Parameters

1) BG Correction


You can set whether or not to use background compensation in the particle analysis

processing. The default is set to “Apply”.

2) Smoothing Filter

“Median, Other 1, Other 2, Don't”

You can select a smoothing filter for eliminating noise.

The default is set to “Median”.3) Edge Enhancing Level

“2D Filter, Other 1, Other 2, Don't”

You can select the edge emphasis processing filter.

The default is set to “2D Filter”.

4) Coefficient for Binarizing

You can set the threshold for binarization processing.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Coef. “A” for Binarizing (Default = 10)

5) Diameter Correction


You can select whether or not to correct the calculated particle diameter parameters and

circularity with the calibration results. The default is set to “Apply”.

5. Statistics Parameters

1) Dilution Ration

When the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is displayed converted to the pre-dilution

value.

You can input a real number up to a maximum of 99,999.

2) Smoothing


You can select whether or not to smooth the frequency distribution display.

The default is set to “Not Apply”.

3) Miles - Lantuejoul Method


You can select whether or not to use frame correction.


4) Density Correction

“Apply/Not Apply”You can select whether or not to correct the particle concentrations with the calibration

results.


6. Limit Analysis Parameters

1) Size Type


2) Size-Dsp Axis Div

You can set and change the number of divisions for the X-axis direction particle distribution

display axis.


3) Sizes Upper Limit


4) Size Lower Limit


5) Size Upper %


NOTE: In the dark field mode, binarization threshold of a particle image used in the particleanalysis is calculated with the following equation.

Binarization threshold = Most frequent brightness of background image + A

A: Threshold Level Coefficient





6) Size Lower %


7) Size-Dsp Axis Max


8) Size-Dsp Axis Min

You can set the minimum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.9) Shape Type


10)Shape-Dsp Axis Div



11)Shape Upper Limit


12)Shape Lower Limit

You can set the lower value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.

13)Shape Upper %


14)Shape Lower %


15)Shape-Dsp Axis Max


distribution.

16)Shape-Dsp Axis Min


distribution.

7. Image Processing Board Settings

You can set the parameters for the image processing board mounted in the main unit.

1) Minimum Pixel

You can set the effective minimum number of pixel captured.

5/12/20/40/60/90/145/215/300/395/510/645/830/950/1050/1250 can be selected.

2) Median Filter

You can set whether or not to use the median filter for smoothing processing.


3) Threshold Level Coefficient

You can set the threshold for binarizing the captured image.Threshold level coef. “a” (Default = 10)

NOTE: In the dark field mode, binarization threshold of a particle image used in particle analysisis calculated with the following equation.

Binarization threshold = Most frequent brightness of background image + aa: Threshold Level Coefficient





8. Extended Analysis 1-5

These items are valid for extending analyses that can be used on the [Analysis Results] screen.

This section explains extending analysis 1 as typical.

1) Analysis Type

“Rectangular analysis/Polygonal analysis”

You can select either rectangular analysis, which limits through normal discriminationoperations, or polygonal analysis, which limits by specifying points on the scattergram.

2) Size Upper Limit


This is only valid when the analysis type is rectangular.

3) Size Lower Limit



4) Shape Upper Limit

You can set the upper value for the Y-axis form.

This is only valid when the analysis type is rectangular.5) Shape Lower Limit

You can set the lower value for the Y-axis form.


6) Polygon Limit Point

These show the polygonal limit points on the scattergram.

This is only valid when the analysis type is polygonal.

The limit points can only be changed on the [Analysis Results] screen.





9. User definition items

The user can mount user definitions by creating their own calculation equation using the

statistical results.

User defined equations 1-10 can be set.

The results of these calculations are stored into the results records.

Below is the method for creating a user-defined equation.

First, move the mouse to the value column for user-defined equation 1-10, then left click to

display the figure below.

Input the item name, calculation equation, and unit, then press the [Setting] button.

Figure J-25: [Setting Extended Analysis items] dialog

The creation method is shown below.

1) Item Name input

You can input the defined equation name. You can input alphanumeric.

2) Equation input

For variables, you can use the following two methods. (For the input characters, lowercase

and uppercase are not distinguished.)





Variables 1:

Variables that take the form (scatter).axis.(parameter)

Scatter: standard item and five extended analysis items

SS1, ES1, ES2, ES3, ES4, ES5

Meanings: SS1 (standard), ES1-ES5 (extended analyses)

Axis: X, YParameters: 7 analysis items

MEAN, MODE, P50, LOWER, UPPER, SD, CV

Meanings: MEAN (average), MODE (mode value), P50 (50% value),

LOWER (lower value), UPPER (upper value), SD (SD), CV (CV)

(Concrete examples)

SS1.X.LOWER: On the standard analysis screen scattergram, of the items selected on the

X axis, this takes the Lower value data as the variable.

Variables 2:

Variables that take the form (scatter).A.(analysis results)

The scattergram is the same as above.

Analysis results: The results analyzed

D, SP, MP, LP, AP, TC, VC, SC

Meaning: D (Density: Particle density), SP (SmallParticle: Small

particle ratio),

MP (MiddleParticle: Middle particle ratio), LP

(LargeParticle: Large particle ratio),

AP (AreaParticle: Particle limit ratio), TC (TotalCounts:

Particle detection count),

VC (ValidCounts: Valid analysis count), SC(SelectedParticle: Selected particle count)

(Concrete examples)

ES1.A.D: Takes the density of the expansion analysis rectangular analysis 1 screen as the

variable.

The functions that can be used are as follows.

Functions: LOG(), LOG10(), EXP(), EXP10(), SQRT()

3) Unit inputInput the unit in alphanumeric.

4) User-defined item example

These are examples of user-defined items.

Example 1: DATA1=LOG(ES2.A.D)

Example 2: DATA2=ES1.A.AP/ES2.AP





9. Maintenance

9.1 Quality Control

Maintain condition of the instrument by performing the quality control since the measurement

results are influenced by flash brightness in the dark field mode. If the condition is out of the qualitycontrol range, "9.2 Adjust ment of the flash brightness" should be performed.

For detail of the quality control, refer to Chapter 6 . In the case of Dark Field Unit, display the

quality control dialog by selecting [Maintenance] - [Quality Control]. The Light field system

combo box in the right side of the dialog becomes valid for selecting dark field or bright field.

9.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness

Use PARTICLE SHEATH as sheath fluid.

Use the polystyrene latex particle of diameter 2µm as a sample. (Refer to the following Flash

Brightness Adjustment Sample)

Be sure to perform the automatic focusing adjustment prior to the adjustment of the flash

brightness.

Adjust flash brightness to an optimized value automatically. Perform the following procedures

when the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit is being used.

1) Select and perform [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Adjustment of flash brightness(DF)].

After processing of the previous sequence is completed, the following dialog appears.

Figure J-26: [Adjustment of flash brightness Sequence] dialog

Dispense 5ml of the prepared flash brightness adjustment sample into the testing unit sample

chamber.

2) Press the [Start] button. Adjustment of flash brightness sequence proceeds.

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample

For flash brightness adjustment sample for dark field, use the polystyrene latex particle of diameter

2µm described in APPENDIX F, FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE, and prepare it in the same

manner as for the focus adjusting sample.

Select [Settings] - [System Parameters]. The flash brightness adjustment sample information

(e.g. lot number) is shown in the displayed [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field, so use the

particle of the same lot number. In the case of changing the particle lot, enter appropriate sample

information in the [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field by referring to the following

description.

In the case of changing things as lot of flash brightness adjustment sample, enter and save the

sample information in the system parameters dialog as follows.

1 Perform automatic focus adjustment using the preset flash brightness adjustment sample, then

check the results for things as particle diameter and intensity mean.

2 Perform the measurement of the updated flash brightness adjustment sample.

3 Select [Settings] - [System Parameters] to open system parameters dialog. Move cursor to

the [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field, and enter the type of the particle and lot

number.

Move cursor to the [Strobe Luminance DF] field, and enter the obtained intensity mean.

Up to 50 characters can be entered for each field.





Figure J-27: [System Parameters] dialog

Strobe Luminance

DF

Flash BrightnessAdjustmentSample field



INDEX

Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 Index-1

Index

A

Accessories ..............................................A-1Adding a quality control file ....................... 6-3

Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure

.......... 14-5Adjusting the pressure .................. .......... 14-1Adjustment of rinse pressure .................. 14-4Adjustment of the flash brightness ......... 15-8Analysis conditions ................................... 4-8Analysis data ........................................ 16-10Analysis parameters ............................... 10-1Auto Focusing ........................................... 3-9Auto rinse ............................................... 15-1Auto target ................................................ 6-6

B

Background Check .......................... 3-7, 15-4Background Count Generated by Erosion

................................................................G-5

C

Change logon user ............................... 13-15Change password ................................... 13-1Changing hardware ...................................J-4Changing the display of the Analysis Results

screen .................................................. 5-34Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit

............................................................ 15-10Changing the fuse in the testing unit ...... 15-9Changing the record display ................... 5-17Check instrument status ........................... 4-2Checking Light Field System ...................J-15Checking the pressure of the testing unit

.............................................................. 14-2Compressor ON ...................................... 15-8Connecting the power cables and connection

cables .................................................. A-22Connecting the tubes ..............................A-17Cover open/close .................................... 15-8

CSV export

............................................. 5-55

D

Data format ...............................................D-7Extend data ........................................D-13Histogram data .....................................D-9Scattergram data ...............................D-11Test results (limited data) .....................D-7

Deleting a quality control data .................. 6-7

Deleting a quality control file ..................... 6-5Deletion ................ ................................... 5-16Detail Results ................... ....................... 5-43Detailed information display .................... 5-37Dismantling the fastener for transportation

................................................................A-8

Display of analysis results ...................... 4-14Display of error history .............................. 7-3Display reset ........................................... 5-13Disposal ............................................. ..... 2-17

E

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ....... 1-7Emergency stop ........................................ 2-6Error code list ............................................ 7-6Error message (in alphabetical order) ...... 7-4Error message list by function .................. 7-7Error messages and troubleshooting ........ 7-9Ethernet communications .........................D-5

Hardware ..............................................D-5Software ...............................................D-5Text format ...........................................D-6Transmission format selection .............D-6

Explanation of labeling .............................. 1-1Exterior dimensions ..................................A-7

F

File menu items ...................................... 5-45File Settings .............................................. 6-2

Focus adjusting particle

............................ F-1Form parameters .................................... 16-8Frequency tables .................................... 5-38

G

Gas sensor level setting values ................E-1Graph (Overlay-View) ............................. 5-40Graph (Trend-View) ................................ 5-44Grounding ........................................2-8, A-25

I

Import ...................................................... 5-48Installation location ................................... 2-7Installation of Acrobat Reader ................A-30Installing and moving the instrument ........ 2-7Installing the analysis PC ........................A-26Instrument inspection ................................ 3-1

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



INDEX

Index-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

L

Lens Unit ...................................................H-1List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic

solvents ..................................................E-2Lockout ................................................. 13-14

MMaintenance ........................................... J-28

Adjustment of the flash brightness ..... J-28Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample

.......................................................... J-29Quality Control .................................... J-28

Manual focusing ...................................... 15-2Measurement condition settings ............... 4-6Merging records ...................................... 5-16Meta Data ............................................... 5-42Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-

3000S) ..................................................A-15Moving records ....................................... 5-20Multi Scattergrams .................................. 5-39

N

Names and functions of the components of theFPIA-3000/3000S ................................. 2-11Front panel/right front panel ............... 2-11Pneumatic unit .................................... 2-15Rear side of the testing unit ................ 2-13

Names of components of the testing unit .. 2-3New ......................................................... 5-46

O

Open ....................................................... 5-47Other test data .................... .................... 16-9Overview of quality control ........................ 6-1Overview of the device .............................. 2-1

P

Packaging ................................................. 2-7Particle analysis ...................................... 16-3Particle diameter parameters .................. 16-7Particle form ............................................D-19Particle image list .................................... 5-35PDF Print ................................................ 5-53Periodic Replacement Parts ................. 15-11Place and space for installation ................A-5Preparation of focus adjustment sample ...F-2Preparing a sample ................................. 4-11Pressure adjustment points .................... 14-3Principle of Dark Field Test ....................... J-1Print format ............................................. 12-1

Deletion ............................................12-24Importing File ......................................12-2New format creation and editing ......... 12-5Preview ............................................. 12-25Saving .............................................. 12-24Saving Files - All Data ........................12-4

Saving Files - Selected Data .............. 12-4Printer paper ............................................. 3-1Printing .................................................... 5-52Process executed after replacing the FPIA-

3000 Dark Field Unit ............................. J-15Processing analysis results .....................5-18Property ..................................................12-8

Character (Label) ...............................12-9Cumulative frequency .......................12-22Frequency Table .............................. 12-21Graph (Overlay-View) .......................12-12Graph (Overlay-View) Table ............. 12-15

Graph (Trend-View) .......................... 12-10Line ..................................................... 12-8Margin Settings ................................12-23Particle Image ..................................12-19Picture ..............................................12-11Record List ....................................... 12-13Results .............................................12-20Scattergram ......................................12-14Testing/Analysis Parameters ............12-16X-Axis Histogram .............................. 12-17Y-Axis Histogram .............................. 12-18

Q

Quality control ...........................................6-1

R

Reagents ............................................2-8, 3-1Reanalyze ......................................5-15, 5-22Record Display and Processing ................ 5-1Replacing the Sheath Fluid ..................... J-12Resetting the alarm ...................................7-1Revert from error .....................................15-2Reverting from an error .............................7-2

S

Sample information revision .................... 5-14Sample information setting .......................4-4Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic

Scanned ................................................ G-7Save ........................................................ 5-50Screen display of the data processing unit

................................................................ 2-4

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



INDEX

Search functions ..................................... 5-11Serial communications .............................D-1

Class A communications ......................D-2Class B communications ......................D-3Communication Format ........................D-1Hardware .............................................D-1

Monitoring the receiver (host) side .......D-4Processing of communication errors with

the host .................... .........................D-4Protocols used in communication with the

host ...................................................D-2Signal Level .........................................D-2

Setting Default Database ...................... 13-14Setting instrument conditions ................... 4-9Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S)

................................................................ 9-5Effects by sheath physical characteristics

...................... ..................................... 9-5

Sheath fluid specific hardware settings

........................................................... 9-6Sheath liquid exchange .......................... 15-5Sheath liquid replacement ........................ 3-5Shutting down (turning off the power) ..... 4-15Signs ......................................................... 1-6Software Conforming to Part 11 ................ I-1SOP setting .............................................. 4-5SOP settings .....................................8-1, J-18Sort functions ............................................ 5-7Specifications ...........................................B-1Starting the analysis program ...........3-3, J-10Statistical analysis .................................. 16-5Statistical analysis items ......................... 16-9Stir motor adjustment ............................. 15-8System configuration ................................ 2-2System setup ............................................ 9-1

U

Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit ........................G-1User Registration .................................... 13-2

V

View settings ........................................... 11-1

View settings - Graph (Overlay-View) 11-9View settings - Graph (Trend-View) ... 11-7View settings - Record list .................. 11-2View settings - Result (Graph) ........... 11-3View settings - Result (List) ................ 11-6

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

Documents

Transcript of FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006